Owners manual

ManualsBrandsLG Electronics ManualsCell PhoneKG320

ﻲﺑﺮﻋ

ﺳرﺎﻓ

ENGLISH

KG320 USER GUIDE

This manual may differ from the phone depending on the phone

software version and service provider used.

0168

مﺪﺨﺘﺴﻤﻟا ﻞﻴﻟد

❙

KG320

❙

LG Electronics Inc.

ﻲﺑﺮﻋ

ﺳرﺎﻓ

ENGLISH

P/N : MMBB0206715 (1.1) h

مﺪﺨﺘﺴﻤﻟا ﻞﻴﻟد KG320

ﻒﺗﺎﻫ ﻦﻣ ﺎ

ﻴﺒﺴﻧ ﻒﻠﺘﺨﻳ ﺪﻗ ﻞﻴﻟﺪﻟا اﺬﻫ نأ مﺪﺨﺘﺴﻤﻟا مﻼﻋإ ﻲﻐﺒﻨﻳ

.ﺔﻣﺪﺨﻟا دوﺰﻣو ﻒﺗﺎﻬﻟا ﺞﻣﺎﻧﺮﺒﻟ ﺎ

ﻘﻓو ﺮﺧﻵ

0168

P/N : MMBB0206715 (1.1) h

Summary of content (289 pages)

PAGE 1
‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﺎرﺳ‬ ENGLISH ‫دﻟﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪم‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﺎرﺳ‬ ENGLISH ❙ KG320 ❙ ‫ دﻟﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪم‬KG 3 2 0 ‫ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ إﻋﻼم اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪم أن ﻫﺬا اﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻧﺴﺒ ًﻴﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‬ .‫ﻵﺧﺮ وﻓﻘًﺎ ﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ وﻣﺰود اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬ P/N : MMBB0206715 (1.1) h LG Electronics Inc. 0168 0168 KG3 2 0 USER GUIDE P/N : MMBB0206715 (1.1) h This manual may differ from the phone depending on the phone software version and service provider used.
PAGE 2
‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬ ‫‪ KG320‬دﻟﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪم‬ ‫ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ إﻋﻼم اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪم أن ﻫﺬا اﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺒﻴﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﻵﺧﺮ وﻓﻘًﺎ ﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ وﻣﺰود‬ ‫ً‬ ‫اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.
PAGE 3
‫اﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮى |‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮى‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪6 ....................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ واﻟﺨﻴﺎرات‪31 .............................‬‬ ‫ﺳﻼﻣﺘﻚ‪7 ..................................................‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻼل اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪32 ..................................‬‬ ‫أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪32 ........................................................‬‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﺠﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ‪33 ...............................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎت ﻣﻦ أﺟﻞ اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻵﻣﻦ واﻟﻔﻌﺎل ‪9 ..........‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰات ‪15 .......................
PAGE 4
‫وﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة ‪47 .........................................‬‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻘﺎط ﺻﻮرة ]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪47 .......................................[1-4‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮا اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪49 .....................................[2-4‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺠﻞ اﻟﺼﻮت ]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪50 ....................................[3-4‬‬ ‫‪] MP3‬اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪51 ..................................................[4-4‬‬ ‫أﻟﺒﻮم اﻟﺼﻮر ]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪54 .........................................[5-4‬‬ ‫اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪55 ..............................................
PAGE 5
‫اﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮى |‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮى‬ ‫اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪73 .................................................‬‬ ‫ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪73 ...................................[1-7‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮن اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪73 .........................................[2-7‬‬ ‫رﺳﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺘﺮﺣﻴﺐ ]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪73 ....................................[3-7‬‬ ‫ﺿﻮء اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪73 .......................................[4-7‬‬ ‫اﻟﺴﻄﻮع ]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪73 ............................................ [5-7‬‬ ‫اﺳﻢ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪74 ......................................
PAGE 6
‫اﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮى‬ ‫|‬ ‫اﻻﻋﺪادات ‪93 ................................................‬‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ واﻟﻮﻗﺖ ]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪93 ..................................... [1-#‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪93 ....................................... [2-#‬‬ ‫اﻟﻠﻐﺔ ]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪93 ................................................. [3-#‬‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪93 ..............................................[4-#‬‬ ‫اﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪97 ..............................................[5-#‬‬ ‫اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪99 ....................................
PAGE 7
‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ |‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﻧﻬﻨﺌﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮاء اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﺠﻮال ‪ KG320‬اﻟﺬي ﻳﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻷداء‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪم وﺻﻐﺮ اﻟﺤﺠﻢ واﻟﻤﺼﻤﻢ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ أﺣﺪث ﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻠﺖ إﻟﻴﻪ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ اﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻت‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺘﻮي دﻟﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻫﺬا ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﺣﻮل‬ ‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام وﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬اﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻗﺮاءة ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﻮاردة ﺑﻜﻞ دﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ أﺟﻞ اﻟﺤﺼﻮل ﻋﻠﻰ أﻓﻀﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎت اﻷداء وﺗﺠﻨﺐ إﻟﺤﺎق اﻟﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ أو ﺳﻮء‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻟﻪ‪ .‬إﺟﺮاء أي ﻧﻮع ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮات أو اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼت ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮح ﺑﻬﺎ ﺻﺮاﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ دﻟﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻫﺬا ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆدي‬ ‫إﻟﻰ إﻟﻐﺎء اﻟﻀﻤﺎن اﻟﺨﺎص ﺑﻬﺬا اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.
PAGE 8
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻌﻴﻦ إﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ اﻷﺣﻮال ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺘﻦ‬ ‫اﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮات‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻴﺪك أﺛﻨﺎء ﻗﻴﺎدة اﻟﺴﻴﺎرة‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮب ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﻄﺎت اﻟﺘﺰود ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻗﻮد‬ ‫أو اﻟﻤﺼﺎﻧﻊ اﻟﻜﻴﻤﺎوﻳﺔ أو ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺠﺮي ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻟﺘﻔﺠﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺴﻼﻣﺘﻚ‪ ،‬اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﻓﻘﻂ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺎت واﻟﺸﻮاﺣﻦ اﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺤﺪدة‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻤﺴﻚ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﺒﺘﻠﺘﻴﻦ أﺛﻨﺎء ﺷﺤﻨﻪ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ذﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ أو إﺣﺪاث ﺗﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺳﻼﻣﺘﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫• اﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎن آﻣﻦ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪا ﻋﻦ اﻷﻃﻔﺎل‪ .
PAGE 9
‫ﺳﻼﻣﺘﻚ |‬ ‫ﺳﻼﻣﺘﻚ‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ أﺟﻬﺰة اﻟﺒﺚ اﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺣﺪوث ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ اﻷﺟﻬﺰة اﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻴﺔ اﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ اﻟﻄﻔﻴﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ أﺟﻬﺰة اﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮن واﻟﺮادﻳﻮ‬ ‫وأﺟﻬﺰة اﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ وﻣﺎ إﻟﻰ ذﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺠﺐ اﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺎت وﻓﻘًﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﺮﻳﻊ ذي اﻟﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻔﻚ أﺟﺰاء اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ أو اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 10
‫اﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﺎت اﻟﺘﺮدد اﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ )ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ( ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻋﻲ)‪(SAR‬‬ ‫ﻟﻘﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻣﻮدﻳﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﺠﻮال ‪ KG320‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺷﺮوط ﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ اﻟﺴﺎرﻳﺔ واﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮض‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺎت اﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ .‬وﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻫﺬه اﻟﺸﺮوط ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎت اﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ اﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎت اﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻬﺪف إﻟﻰ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻷﺷﺨﺎص ﺑﻐﺾ اﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫أﻋﻤﺎرﻫﻢ أوﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺻﺤﺘﻬﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎت ﻣﻦ أﺟﻞ اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻵﻣﻦ واﻟﻔﻌﺎل‬ ‫اﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻗﺮاءة ﺗﻠﻚ اﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎت اﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ‪ .
PAGE 11
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎت ﻣﻦ أﺟﻞ اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻵﻣﻦ واﻟﻔﻌﺎل |‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎت ﻣﻦ أﺟﻞ اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻵﻣﻦ واﻟﻔﻌﺎل‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻢ اﺧﺘﺒﺎر أﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻤﻌﺪل اﻻﻣﺘﺼﺎص اﻟﻨﻮﻋﻲ ‪SAR‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻮدﻳﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻫﺬا ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ DASY4‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻓﻲ اﻷذن‬ ‫وﻗﺪ ﺑﻠﻐﺖ ‪ 0.129‬وات‪/‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﺟﺮام )‪ 10‬ﺟﺮام(‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ وﺻﻴﺎﻧﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ! ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﺳﻮى اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺎت واﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ واﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎت‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪة ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻣﻊ ﻣﻮدﻳﻞ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆدي‬ ‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام أي أﻧﻮاع أﺧﺮى ﻏﻴﺮ اﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪة إﻟﻰ إﺑﻄﺎل أي ﺗﺼﺪﻳﻖ‬ ‫أو ﺿﻤﺎن ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬وﻗﺪ ﻳﺸﻜﻞ ذﻟﻚ ﺧﻄﺮاً‪.
PAGE 12
‫•‬ ‫اﻷﺟﻬﺰة اﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻟﻬﻮاﺗﻒ اﻟﺠﻮاﻟﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻌﺮض ﻟﻠﺘﺪاﺧﻞ )اﻟﺘﺸﻮش( ﻣﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻓﻲ اﻷداء‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ اﻟﺠﻮال ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮب ﻣﻦ اﻷﺟﻬﺰة اﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ‬ ‫دون اﻟﺤﺼﻮل ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮاﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﺗﺠﻨﺐ وﺿﻊ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻮق‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎز ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺿﺮﺑﺎت اﻟﻘﻠﺐ‪ ،‬ﻛﻮﺿﻌﻪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﻴﺐ اﻟﻌﻠﻮي‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻼً‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ اﻟﻘﻴﺎدة‬ ‫اﻃﻠﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻘﻮاﻧﻴﻦ واﻟﻠﻮاﺋﺢ اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﻬﻮاﺗﻒ‬ ‫اﻟﺠﻮاﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮد ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم اﻟﻬﻮاﺗﻒ اﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻳﺪوﻳًﺎً أﺛﻨﺎء ﻗﻴﺎدة اﻟﺴﻴﺎرة‪.‬‬ ‫• اﻋﻂ اﻟﻘﻴﺎدة اﻧﺘﺒﺎﻫﻚ اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.
PAGE 13
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎت ﻣﻦ أﺟﻞ اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻵﻣﻦ واﻟﻔﻌﺎل |‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎت ﻣﻦ أﺟﻞ اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻵﻣﻦ واﻟﻔﻌﺎل‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ وﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﺴﻴﺎرة ﻗﺒﻞ إﺟﺮاء‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ أو اﻟﺮد ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ وذﻟﻚ إذا ﻣﺎ اﺳﺘﺪﻋﺖ ﻇﺮوف اﻟﻘﻴﺎدة‬ ‫ذﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ اﻟﺘﺮدد اﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ‬ ‫اﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻴﺎرﺗﻚ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺠﺴﻢ اﻟﺼﻮت )اﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ(‬ ‫وﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﻷﻣﺎن ﻣﺜﻼً‪.‬‬ ‫• إذا ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺳﻴﺎرﺗﻚ ﻣﺰودة ﺑﻮﺳﺎﺋﺪ ﻫﻮاﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﻌﻖ ﻣﺴﺎرﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ أو ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻤﻦ اﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ أن‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬا ﻓﻲ اﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﻹﺻﺎﺑﺎت ﺧﻄﻴﺮة ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ‪.
PAGE 14
‫اﻷﻃﻔﺎل‬ ‫ﻳﺤﻔﻆ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎن آﻣﻦ ﺑﻌﻴﺪا ً ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎول اﻷﻃﻔﺎل‪.‬‬ ‫ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ أﺟﺰاء ﺻﻐﻴﺮة ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﺧﻄﺮ اﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻻﺧﺘﻨﺎق ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎل ﻓﻜﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻋﻦ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ واﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻠﺰﻣﻚ إﻓﺮاغ ﺷﺤﻨﺔ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ إﻋﺎدة‬ ‫اﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ .‬ﻓﺒﺨﻼف ﺑﻘﻴﺔ أﻧﻈﻤﺔ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺎت اﻷﺧﺮى‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ‬ ‫أي ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﺬاﻛﺮة ﻣﻦ ﺷﺄﻧﻪ أن ﻳﻀﻌﻒ ﻣﻦ أداء اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﺳﻮى ﺑﻄﺎرﻳﺎت وﺷﺎﺣﻦ ‪ LG‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻟﻘﺪ ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ‪ LG‬ﻟﻴﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﺮ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ أو ﻗﺼﺮ داﺋﺮﺗﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 15
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎت ﻣﻦ أﺟﻞ اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻵﻣﻦ واﻟﻔﻌﺎل |‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎت ﻣﻦ أﺟﻞ اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻵﻣﻦ واﻟﻔﻌﺎل‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﻮﺻﻼت اﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪال اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪم ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻷداء‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮب‪ .‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ إﻋﺎدة ﺷﺤﻦ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﻣﺌﺎت‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺮات ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺤﻴﻦ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ اﻟﺬي ﻳﻠﺰم اﺳﺘﺒﺪاﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫أﻋﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎل ﻋﺪم اﺳﺘﺨﺪاﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺮة‬ ‫زﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻟﺰﻳﺎدة ﻓﺘﺮة اﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪام‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮض ﺷﺎﺣﻦ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﻟﻀﻮء اﻟﺸﻤﺲ اﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ وﻻ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻓﻲ أﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ اﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ دورات اﻟﻤﻴﺎه‪.
PAGE 16
‫ﻣﻴﺰات ‪KG320‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ أﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ رﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎر‪ :‬إدﺧﺎل اﻷرﻗﺎم اﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮب اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﻬﺎ واﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮار ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ – 0‬اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﺪوﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ – 1‬ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ اﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬ ‫‪ 2‬إﻟﻰ ‪ –9‬اﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ اﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫* – ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ اﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ "اﻟﺘﻘﺎط ﺻﻮرة"‪.‬‬ ‫‪ – #‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺿﻮء اﻟﻔﻼش ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮا‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ إﻳﻘﺎف ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ‪ −‬أﺛﻨﺎء إدﺧﺎل رﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ‪ −‬ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎح ﻟﻔﺘﺮة ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ :‬إدﺧﺎل اﻷرﻗﺎم واﻷﺣﺮف‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰات ‪KG320‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ اﻷذن‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 17
‫ﻣﻴﺰات ‪| KG320‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰات ‪KG320‬‬ ‫‪ .5‬ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ /‬اﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫! ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺮﺟﺎء اﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ أن اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ وﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺴﻜﻮن ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪.USB‬‬ ‫‪ .6‬ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻜﺒﺮة داﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻤﻊ اﻟﻰ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪ MP3‬ﺑﺪون اﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ اﻟﻰ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺮأس ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .7‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﺧﺘﺼﺎر اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮا واﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮا )ﺿﻐﻂ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًة )ﺿﻐﻂ ﻗﺼﻴﺮ(‪.
PAGE 18
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎل‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎر‪:‬‬ ‫‪ U‬ﻟﻔﺘﺮة وﺟﻴﺰة‪ :‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻟﻔﺘﺮة وﺟﻴﺰة‪ :‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻷﺳﻤﺎء‬ ‫‪ R‬ﻟﻔﺘﺮة وﺟﻴﺰة‪ :‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫‪ L‬ﻟﻔﺘﺮة وﺟﻴﺰة‪ :‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻷوﺿﺎع‬ ‫اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮار‪ :‬ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ‪/‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ وﺿﻊ‬ ‫اﻻﻫﺘﺰاز‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ :‬اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ وأﺳﻔﻞ‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‬ ‫اﻟﻘﻴﺎم ﺑﻀﻐﻄﺔ ﻗﺼﻴﺮة‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮض اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮدة ﻓﻲ اﻻﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰات ‪KG320‬‬ ‫|‬ ‫‪1 2‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﺎ اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬ ‫ﺗﺆدي ﻫﺬه اﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰء اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 19
‫ﻣﻴﺰات ‪KG320‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰات ‪| KG320‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﺧﻠﻔﻲ‬ ‫‪18‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻓﻼش‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﻋﺪﺳﺔ اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮا‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮا اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬ ‫‪ .5‬ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SIM‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 20
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﻌﺮض‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮض اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﻣﻮز‪ .‬وﻫﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﺤﺔ أدﻧﺎه‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺠﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫اﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫إﺷﺎرات ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﻲ اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬ ‫اﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺮض ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ اﻟﺮﻣﻮز‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺴﻄﺮ اﻷول‬ ‫اﻧﻈﺮ اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.20‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺮض اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ واﻹرﺷﺎدات وأﻳﺔ‬ ‫اﻷﺳﻄﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﺗﻘﻮم ﺑﺈدﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ اﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬ ‫اﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮب اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺮض اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫اﻟﺴﻄﺮ اﻷﺧﻴﺮ‬ ‫اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺣﻲ اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰات ‪KG320‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ اﻟﻨﺺ واﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎت‬ ‫اﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫اﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ إﻟﻰ ﻗﻮة إﺷﺎرة اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪❈ .
PAGE 21
‫ﻣﻴﺰات ‪KG320‬‬ ‫اﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫اﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰات ‪| KG320‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ إﻟﻰ وﺟﻮد ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺟﺎرﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ إﻟﻰ إﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪.GPRS‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ إﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ اﻟﻰ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺧﺪﻣﺔ اﻟﺘﺠﻮال‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ إﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ إﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ وﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ إﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ وﺿﻊ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ اﻷذن‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ إﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺷﺤﻦ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ إﻟﻰ إﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ إﻟﻰ اﺳﺘﻼم رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ إﻟﻰ وﺻﻮل اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ إﻟﻰ ‪.WAP‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ إﻟﻰ اﺳﺘﻼم رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ إﻟﻰ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ‪.
PAGE 22
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ إﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻗﺒﻞ إﺧﺮاج اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬أزل ﻏﻄﺎء اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫وﺣﺮﻛﻪ ﺗﺠﺎه اﻟﺠﺰء اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ‬ ‫اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﻄﺎء‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ أزل ﻏﻄﺎء اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬إﺧﺮاج اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ‬ ‫أﻣﺴﻚ اﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﺛﻢ ارﻓﻊ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎن ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﺧﺮاج ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SIM‬‬ ‫اﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ‬ ‫إدﺧﺎل ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬واﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ .3‬إدﺧﺎل ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.SIM‬‬ ‫أدﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﻓﻲ اﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ؛ ﺛﻢ اﺳﺤﺒﻬﺎ داﺧﻞ اﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‪.
PAGE 23
‫اﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ |‬ ‫! ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ إدﺧﺎل‪/‬إﺧﺮاج ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،SIM‬ﻳﺠﺐ إﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫وإﻻ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺘﻠﻒ اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت أو اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪.SIM‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬إدﺧﺎل اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ‬ ‫ادﺧﻞ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺤﺎذاة‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ اﻟﺬﻫﺒﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ أﻃﺮاف اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ‬ ‫)اﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ اﻟﺬﻫﺒﻴﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎن‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‬ ‫إﻟﻰ أن ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫! ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ أو إزاﻟﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﺧﻲ اﻟﺤﺬر ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ اﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﺤﺎدة ﻟﻐﻄﺎء اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 24
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫اﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ‬ ‫! ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﻘﻮة ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆدي‬ ‫ذﻟﻚ إﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ و‪/‬أو ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫• إذا ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﺷﺎﺣﻦ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﺧﺎرج ﺑﻠﺪك‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﻣﺤﻮل ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﻣﻦ أﺟﻞ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ أو ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬أﺛﻨﺎء ﺷﺤﻦ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫اﻧﺰع ﻛﺎﺑﻞ اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ واﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪر اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‬ ‫أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻌﻮاﺻﻒ اﻟﺮﻋﺪﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﻔﺎدي ﺣﺪوث ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫أو ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪم ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺔ اﻷﺷﻴﺎء اﻟﺤﺎدة ﻛﺄﺳﻨﺎن‬ ‫اﻟﺤﻴﻮاﻧﺎت واﻟﻤﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﻨﺎك ﺧﻄﺮ أن‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬا ﻓﻲ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.
PAGE 25
‫اﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ |‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ اﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‬ ‫‪24‬‬ ‫اﻓﺼﻞ اﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ اﻟﻤﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ أزراره اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ اﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪.
PAGE 26
‫اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫إﺟﺮاء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻹرﺳﺎل‬ ‫‪ .1‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎح ‪ S‬ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض آﺧﺮ أرﻗﺎم‬ ‫اﻟﻬﻮاﺗﻒ اﻟﻮاردة واﻟﺼﺎدرة واﻟﻔﺎﺋﺘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﺮﻗﻢ اﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮب ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎح ‪.S‬‬ ‫إﺟﺮاء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ دوﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺘﻚ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ‪E‬‬ ‫اﻹﻧﻬﺎء‪.‬‬ ‫إﺟﺮاء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺠﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ اﻷﺳﻤﺎء وأرﻗﺎم اﻟﻬﻮاﺗﻒ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮر ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ إﻟﻰ ذاﻛﺮة اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻌﺮوﻓﺔ ﺳﺠﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.
PAGE 27
‫اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ |‬ ‫اﻟﺮد ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪26‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﻼم )ﺗﻠﻘﻲ( ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺼﺪر اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ رﻧﻴ ًﻨﺎ وﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض‬ ‫رﻣﺰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﻮاﻣﺾ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬إذا ﺗﻢ اﻟﺘﻌﺮف‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ اﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض رﻗﻢ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ )أو‬ ‫اﻻﺳﻢ إذا ﻛﺎن ﻣﺨﺰﻧًﺎ ﻓﻲ دﻟﻴﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ‪ S‬أو ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻟﻠﺮد‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ واردة‪ .
PAGE 28
‫! ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻟﺤﻘﻮل ﺑﻮﺿﻊ إدﺧﺎل ﻧﺺ واﺣﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫)ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﺜﺎل‪ ،‬رﻗﻢ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻮل دﻓﺘﺮ اﻟﻌﻨﺎوﻳﻦ(‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ إدﺧﺎل اﻟﺤﺮوف اﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﺜﺎل‪ ،‬ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ اﻷﺳﻤﺎء‬ ‫ﻓﻲ دﻟﻴﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ وﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ وإﻧﺸﺎء رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﺣﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ أو إدراج اﻷﺣﺪاث ﻓﻲ ﺳﺠﻞ‪ ،‬ﻛﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺰم ﻫﻮ إدﺧﺎل‬ ‫ﻧﺺ‪ .‬وﺗﺘﻮاﻓﺮ اﻟﻄﺮق اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺈدﺧﺎل اﻟﻨﺺ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻮﺿﻊ إدﺧﺎل اﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎت ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎح ﺿﻐﻄﺔ واﺣﺪة ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺣﺮف ﺗﺮﻳﺪ إدﺧﺎﻟﻪ‪ .
PAGE 29
‫اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ |‬ ‫اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫وﺿﻊ ‪) 123‬وﺿﻊ اﻷرﻗﺎم(‬ ‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام وﺿﻊ ‪T9‬‬ ‫اﻛﺘﺐ اﻷرﻗﺎم ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ واﺣﺪة ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻜﻞ رﻗﻢ ﻳﺮاد‬ ‫ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺘﻪ‪.‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎل إﻟﻰ وﺿﻊ اﻷرﻗﺎم ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻞ ﻣﺪﺧﻼت اﻟﻨﺺ‪،‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ‪#‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض وﺿﻊ اﻷرﻗﺎم ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ وﺿﻊ إدﺧﺎل اﻟﻨﺺ ‪ T9‬واﻟﻤﻌﺮوف ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﻨﺒﺌﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ إدﺧﺎل اﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎت ﺑﻜﻞ ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻊ أﻗﻞ ﻋﺪد ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫اﻟﻀﻐﻄﺎت ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻓﻌﻨﺪ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ أي ﻣﻔﺘﺎح‬ ‫ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻳﺒﺪأ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮض اﻷﺣﺮف اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻌﺘﻘﺪ‬ ‫أﻧﻚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺘﻬﺎ وذﻟﻚ ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﻣﻮس ﻣﺪﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.
PAGE 30
‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮوج ﻣﻦ وﺿﻊ إدﺧﺎل اﻟﻨﺺ ﺑﺪون اﻟﻘﻴﺎم ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ اﻟﻤﺪﺧﻼت‪،‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ‪ .E‬ﻳﻌﻮد اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ إﻟﻰ وﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪاد‬ ‫ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻣﻦ ‪2‬إﻟﻰ ‪9‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎم‬ ‫ﺑﺈدﺧﺎل اﻟﻨﺺ اﻟﺨﺎص ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎح اﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮع واﻟﺬي ﻳﺤﻤﻞ اﻟﺤﺮف‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺮاد ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺘﻪ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺿﻐﻄﺔ واﺣﺪة ﻟﻠﺤﺮف اﻷول‬ ‫• ﺿﻐﻄﺘﺎن ﻟﻠﺤﺮف اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫• وﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﺤﻮ‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻹدﺧﺎل ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎح ‪0‬ﻣﺮة‬ ‫واﺣﺪة ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪم وﺿﻊ أ ب ت )اﻟﺤﺮوف(‬ ‫|‬ ‫• ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ اﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﺣﺮف ﻳﺘﻢ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺘﻪ‪ .
PAGE 31
‫اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫! ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ |‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺟﺎء اﻟﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ اﻟﺠﺪول اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ اﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺤﺮوف‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺘﻮاﻓﺮة ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪30‬‬ ‫اﻷﺣﺮف اﻟﻤﺘﻮاﻓﺮة وﻓﻘﺎً ﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎح‬ ‫أﺣﺮف‬ ‫‪ 1‬؛‪.1،!:‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬بتةث‪2‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬اأإآىؤئء‪3‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬سشصض‪4‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬دذرز ‪5‬‬ ‫‪ 6‬جحخ‪6‬‬ ‫‪ 7‬نهوى‪7‬‬ ‫‪ 8‬فقكلم‪8‬‬ ‫‪ 9‬طظعغ‪9‬‬ ‫‪ 0‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﻔﺎﺻﻠﺔ‪0 ،‬‬ ‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام وﺿﻊ ‪) 123‬وﺿﻊ اﻷرﻗﺎم(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ وﺿﻊ اﻷرﻗﺎم ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﻴﺎم ﺑﺈدﺧﺎل اﻷرﻗﺎم ﻓﻲ ﻧﺺ‬ ‫اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ )رﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﺜﺎل(‪.
PAGE 32
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ واﻟﺨﻴﺎرات‬ ‫ﺳﺠﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬ ‫اﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮل إﻟﻰ إدﺧﺎﻻت اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮل إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎت اﻻﺗﺼﺎل اﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ واﻟﺨﻴﺎرات‬ ‫|‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ وﻓﻘًﺎ ﻟﺮﻏﺒﺎﺗﻚ‪ .‬ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ رﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ وﻗﻮاﺋﻢ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﻟﻮﺻﻮل إﻟﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰة <و >‪ .‬ﺗﺴﻤﺢ‬ ‫ﻟﻚ ﻛﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ رﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ وﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺮض وﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ إﻋﺪادات‬ ‫اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪.
PAGE 33
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻼل اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻼل اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ |‬ ‫ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻣﺰود ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ وﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪاﻣﻬﺎ أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬ ‫أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬ ‫>]ﺧﻴﺎرات[‪.‬‬ ‫أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻤﻌﺮوﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ أﺛﻨﺎء‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻋﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮن‬ ‫اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪاد‪ ،‬واﻟﺨﻴﺎرات ﻣﺸﺮوﺣﺔ أدﻧﺎه‪.‬‬ ‫اﺟﺮاء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ )ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﺤﺼﻮل ﻋﻠﻰ رﻗﻢ اﺗﺼﺎل ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻃﻠﺒﻪ ﻣﻦ دﻟﻴﻞ‬ ‫اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻹﺟﺮاء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ .
PAGE 34
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﺘﻢ اﻟﺼﻮت اﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ]ﺧﻴﺎرات[ ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ] ﻛﺘﻢ اﻟﺼﻮت[‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﻋﺎدة‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻮت ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ]إﻋﺎدة اﻟﺼﻮت[ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮن ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ ﻛﺘﻢ‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻮت ‪،‬اﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﻻ ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﻚ‪ ،‬وﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺎع اﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﺠﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﺘﻢ اﻟﺼﻮت‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻨﺤﻚ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﺠﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ اﻟﻘﺪرة ﻋﻠﻰ إﺟﺮاء أﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺎدﺛﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﻊ أﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ واﺣﺪ‪ ،‬إذا‬ ‫ﻛﺎن ﻣﺰود ﺧﺪﻣﺔ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻤﻴﺰة‪ .
PAGE 35
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻼل اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ |‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻼل اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪34‬‬ ‫وأﺧﺮى ﻣﻌﻠﻘﺔ وﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ اﻟﺮد ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺘﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮد إﻋﺪاد‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺟﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت أو ﻗﻄﻊ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل‬ ‫ﺑﻬﺎ أو اﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ )أي إﺧﺮاﺟﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ اﻟﺠﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ اﺳﺘﻤﺮار اﺗﺼﺎﻟﻚ ﺑﻬﺎ( ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ اﻟﺸﺨﺺ اﻟﺬي ﻗﺎم‬ ‫ﺑﺈﻋﺪاد اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ اﻟﺠﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺗﻠﻚ اﻟﺨﻴﺎرات‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﻮاردة‪ .‬أﻗﺼﻰ ﻋﺪد ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ اﻟﺠﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻫﻮ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ‪ .
PAGE 36
‫إﻧﻬﺎء اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ اﻟﺠﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ اﻟﻤﺆﺗﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ إﺧﺮاج اﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻦ إﺣﺪى اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت‬ ‫اﻟﺠﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎح ‪.E‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻼل اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻹﺟﺮاء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻣﻊ أﺣﺪ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﻲ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺠﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬اﻋﺮض رﻗﻢ اﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ اﻟﺬي ﺗﺮﻳﺪ اﻟﺘﺤﺪث إﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻳﺴﺮ‪ .‬ﺣﺪد‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ »ﺧﺎص« ﻣﻦ »ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺟﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ« ﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ اﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ‪.
PAGE 37
‫ﺳﺮد ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ اﻟﻘﻮاﺋﻢ |‬ ‫ﺳﺮد ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ اﻟﻘﻮاﺋﻢ‬ ‫‪36‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬اﻻﻟﻌﺎب واﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪ 1‬اﻻﻟﻌﺎب واﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪ 2‬اﻷوﺿﺎع‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺳﺠﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺑﺤﺚ‬ ‫‪ 2‬اﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت اﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪ 4‬اﻻﺗﺼﺎل اﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫‪ 5‬رﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻲ‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ أﻋﻤﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫‪ 7‬اﻹﻋﺪادات‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻣﻨﻈﻢ اﻟﻤﻮاﻋﻴﺪ‬ ‫‪ 1‬اﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻣﺬﻛﺮة‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬ ‫‪ 4‬وﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة‬ ‫‪ 1‬اﻟﺘﻘﺎط ﺻﻮرة‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮا اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻣﺴﺠﻞ اﻟﺼﻮت‬ ‫‪MP3 4‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬أﻟﺒﻮم اﻟﺼﻮر‬ ‫‪ 6‬اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪ 5‬اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫‪ 1‬رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪة‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﻮارد‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻣﺴﻮدات‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺼﺎدر‬
PAGE 38
‫ﺳﺮد ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ اﻟﻘﻮاﺋﻢ‬ ‫*‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ‬ ‫‪ 1‬اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 2‬اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎت‬ ‫‪ 3‬اﻟﺬﻫﺎب اﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﻮان اﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‬ ‫‪ 4‬اﻹﻋﺪادات‬ ‫‪ 0‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت ﻟﻢ ﻳﺮد ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت واردة‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت ﺻﺎدرة‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻛﻞ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺣﺬف اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﺤﺪﻳﺜﺔ‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت‬ ‫‪ 7‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ‪GPRS‬‬ ‫‪#‬‬ ‫اﻻﻋﺪادات‬ ‫‪ 1‬اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ واﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪ 3‬اﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪ 5‬اﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ 6‬اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫‪ 7‬ﺿﺒﻂ ‪GPRS‬‬ ‫‪ 8‬ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة‬ ‫‪ 9‬إﻋﺎدة ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ‬ ‫|‬ ‫‪ 7‬اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻟﻮ
PAGE 39
‫اﻻﻟﻌﺎب واﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬ ‫اﻻﻟﻌﺎب واﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ |‬ ‫اﻻﻟﻌﺎب واﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪38‬‬ ‫]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[1-1‬‬ ‫اﻷﻟﻌﺎب اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎت ﺟﺎﻓﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﺠﻮال‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎت أو ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ أو ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ أو ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎر‬ ‫اﻻﺗﺼﺎل‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ اﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎت اﻟﺘﻲ ﺟﺮى ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ داﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪات‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻳﺴﺮ >]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ اﻟﻤﺤﺪد أو ﺑﺪء اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ اﻟﻤﺤﺪد‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺧﻴﺎرات[ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﻋﺮض اﻟﻘﻮاﺋﻢ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮة ﻟﻠﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺨﻴﺎرات‪.
PAGE 40
‫اﻻﻟﻌﺎب واﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬ ‫|‬ ‫! ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• اﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮع ‪ JAR‬ﻫﻮ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻣﻀﻐﻮط ﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺟﺎﻓﺎ‬ ‫وﺻﻔﻴﺎ ﻳﺤﺘﻮي ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫وﻳﻌﺪ اﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮع ‪ JAD‬ﻣﻠﻔًﺎ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬وﻣﻦ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ وﻗﺒﻞ أن‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮض ﻛﺎﻓﺔ أوﺻﺎف‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل ﻣﻠﻒ ‪.JAD‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻊ اﻟﻌﻠﻢ أن ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎت ﺟﺎﻓﺎ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻐﺔ )‪(J2ME‬‬ ‫اﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻛﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎت ﺟﺎﻓﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬ ‫أﻧﻮاع اﻟﻬﻮاﺗﻒ اﻟﻤﻌﺮوﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺒﻴﻊ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم‬ ‫اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﺮاﺟﻊ ﺑﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ‪ .
PAGE 41
‫ﺳﺠﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺑﺤﺚ‬ ‫]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[1-2‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺣﺪد اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺤﺚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬أدﺧﻞ اﻻﺳﻢ اﻟﺬي ﺗﺮﻳﺪ اﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻨﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺠﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ |‬ ‫! ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫‪40‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫وﺗﺘﻮاﻓﺮ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺒﺤﺚ اﻟﻔﻮري ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ إدﺧﺎل اﻟﺤﺮف اﻷول‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺳﻢ أو اﻟﺮﻗﻢ اﻷوﻟﻲ اﻟﺬي ﺗﻮد اﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻨﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ .3‬إذا رﻏﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ أﺣﺪ اﻹدﺧﺎﻻت أو ﺣﺬﻓﻪ أو‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺨﻪ أو إﺿﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻷﺣﺪ ﻫﺬه اﻹدﺧﺎﻻت‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺪد‬ ‫>]ﺧﻴﺎرات[‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ اﻻﺳﻢ واﻟﺮﻗﻢ وﺣﺮوف‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ واﻟﺼﻮرة ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ‪.
PAGE 42
‫! ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ اﻟﺤﺪ اﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻣﻦ ﻃﻮل اﻻﺳﻢ واﻟﺮﻗﻢ اﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻧﻮع ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.SIM‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺣﺪد اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪد اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ اﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬أو‬ ‫اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬إذا ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺤﺘﺎج إﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫اﻟﺮﻗﻢ اﻟﺬي ﺗﺮﻳﺪه أن ﻳﻜﻮن رﻗﻤﺎً رﺋﻴﺴﻴﺎً‪.‬‬ ‫ه‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت اﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ‬ ‫]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[3-2‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺪوﻳﻦ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 20‬ﻋﻀﻮا ً ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ اﻟﻮاﺣﺪة‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ‪7‬‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﻟﺘﺪوﻳﻦ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻻﻋﻀﺎء‪ :‬ﺗﻌﺮض أﻋﻀﺎء اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.
PAGE 43
‫ﺳﺠﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺳﺠﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ |‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪42‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻧﻐﻤﺔ رﻧﻴﻦ اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ رﻧﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت أﻋﻀﺎء اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﺮﻣﺰ اﻟﺨﺎص‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻀﻮ‪ :‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ أﻋﻀﺎء ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ أﻻ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻋﺪد أﻋﻀﺎء ﻛﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻋﻦ ‪ 20‬ﻋﻀﻮاً‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬف ﻋﻀﻮ‪ :‬ﻹزاﻟﺔ ﻋﻀﻮ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ أﻋﻀﺎء اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬إﻻ‬ ‫أن اﻻﺳﻢ واﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻳﻈﻼن ﻓﻲ دﻟﻴﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫إﻋﺎدة ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ اﺳﻢ اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬف اﻟﻜﻞ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ إﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺣﺬف ﻛﻞ اﻷﻋﻀﺎء‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮدﻳﻦ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪.
PAGE 44
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ أﻋﻤﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[6-2‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺨﻴﺎر إﻧﺸﺎء ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ اﻷﻋﻤﺎل اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫واﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻀﻢ اﻻﺳﻢ ورﻗﻢ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮل‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ أﻋﻤﺎل ﺟﺪﻳﺪة‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬ ‫اﻷﻳﺴﺮ > ]ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ[ وأدﺧﻞ اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻓﻲ اﻟﺤﻘﻮل‪.‬‬ ‫اﻹﻋﺪادات‬ ‫اﻧﺘﻘﻞ إﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪد > ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[‪.‬‬ ‫]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[7-2‬‬ ‫• ﺧﻴﺎرات اﻟﻌﺮض‬ ‫اﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪد >]اﺧﺘﻴﺎر[‪.‬‬ ‫ اﻻﺳﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ :‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ دﻟﻴﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺮض اﻻﺳﻢ‬‫ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ اﻻﺳﻢ واﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪ :‬ﺿﺒﻂ دﻟﻴﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض‬‫اﻻﺳﻢ واﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪.
PAGE 45
‫ﺳﺠﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ |‬ ‫ﺳﺠﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫‪44‬‬ ‫• ﻧﺴﺦ‪/‬ﻧﻘﻞ اﻟﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ‪ /‬ﻧﻘﻞ اﻹدﺧﺎﻻت ﻣﻦ ذاﻛﺮة ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬إﻟﻰ ذاﻛﺮة‬ ‫اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ واﻟﻌﻜﺲ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻧﺘﻘﻞ إﻟﻰ ﻧﺴﺦ اﻟﻜﻞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[‬ ‫ﻟﺪﺧﻮل ﻫﺬه اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ إﻟﻰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪ :SIM‬ﻟﻨﺴﺦ اﻹدﺧﺎل ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬إﻟﻰ‬‫ذاﻛﺮة اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ إﻟﻰ ‪ :SIM‬ﻟﻨﺴﺦ اﻹدﺧﺎل ﻣﻦ ذاﻛﺮة اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬‫إﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.SIM‬‬ ‫• اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة ﻗﻴﺪ اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻤﻴﺰة ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻋﺪد اﻹدﺧﺎﻻت اﻟﺨﺎﻟﻲ واﻟﺬي‬ ‫ﻫﻮ ﻗﻴﺪ اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻓﻲ دﻟﻴﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.
PAGE 46
‫ﻣﻨﻈﻢ اﻟﻤﻮاﻋﻴﺪ‬ ‫اﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫*‪#‬‬ ‫اﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺳﻨﻮﻳًﺎ‬ ‫ﺷﻬﺮﻳًﺎ‬ ‫اﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫‪UD‬‬ ‫‪LR‬‬ ‫اﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫أﺳﺒﻮﻋﻴﺎ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻣﻴﺎ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[1-1-3‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺨﻴﺎر إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﺪول ﺟﺪﻳﺪ وﻣﺬﻛﺮة ﻟﻴﻮم ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ إﻟﻰ ‪ 20‬ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻇﺔ‪ .‬أدﺧﻞ اﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮع‬ ‫واﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻳﺴﺮ >]ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ[‪ .‬ﺛﻢ أدﺧﻞ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﻤﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻷﺟﺰاء اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪" :‬اﻟﻮﻗﺖ" و"اﻟﺘﻜﺮار"‬ ‫و"اﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ"‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻔﻜﺮة اﻟﻴﻮﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[2-1-3‬‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻌﺮض ﻛﻞ اﻟﺠﺪاول واﻟﻤﻔﻜﺮات اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻴﻮم ﻣﺤﺪد‪.
PAGE 47
‫ﻣﻨﻈﻢ اﻟﻤﻮاﻋﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺣﺬف اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[3-1-3‬‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺬف ﺟﺪول اﻟﻤﻬﺎم اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ اﻟﺬي ﺗﻢ إﻋﻼﻣﻚ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬف اﻟﻜﻞ‬ ‫]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[4-1-3‬‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺬف ﻛﻞ اﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎت‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﻢ اﻟﻤﻮاﻋﻴﺪ |‬ ‫اﻧﺘﻘﺎل إﻟﻰ اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ‬ ‫]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[5-1-3‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًة إﻟﻰ اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ اﻟﺬي ﺗﻢ اﺧﺘﻴﺎره‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ اﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ‬ ‫]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[6-1-3‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ اﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ ﺗﻢ اﺧﺘﻴﺎره‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺬﻛﺮة‬ ‫]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[2-3‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺣﺪد اﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮة ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬ ‫>]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[‬ ‫‪46‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 48
‫! ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮر ﻣﺆﺷﺮ اﻧﺨﻔﺎض ﻃﺎﻗﺔ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‬ ‫وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮا أو وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪدة‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺒﺪو ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺷﺤﻦ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام وﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪدة‪ ،‬وذﻟﻚ ﻧﻈﺮًا ﻟﺰﻳﺎدة‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺪل اﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼك اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻘﺎط ﺻﻮرة‬ ‫]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[1-4‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺣﺪد "اﻟﺘﻘﺎط ﺻﻮرة" ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح >‪ .‬إذا‬ ‫أردت اﻟﻮﺻﻮل إﻟﻰ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮة‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪Q‬‬ ‫ﻣﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮار‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪد اﻟﺸﻰء اﻟﻤﺮاد اﻟﺘﻘﺎط ﺻﻮرة ﻟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪.
PAGE 49
‫وﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة‬ ‫•‬ ‫وﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة |‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪48‬‬ ‫اﻟﺤﺠﻢ ] [‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ دﻗﺔ ﺣﺠﻢ اﻟﺼﻮرة‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ )‪ (1280x960‬أو ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‬ ‫)‪ (640x480‬أو ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ )‪ (320x240‬أو )‪ (176x220‬أو‬ ‫)‪ .(72x72‬ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ اﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎت اﻟﻤﺤﺎﻃﺔ ﺑﺈﻃﺎر ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ‪176x220‬‬ ‫ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ] [‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺨﻴﺎر ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ وﻗﺖ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺛﻮان و ‪5‬‬ ‫اﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎط واﻹﻋﺪادات اﻟﻤﺘﻮاﻓﺮة ﻫﻲ )إﻳﻘﺎف و ‪ٍ 3‬‬ ‫ﺛﻮان(‪ .‬ﻳﻠﺘﻘﻂ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﺼﻮرة ﺑﻌﺪ وﻗﺖ اﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺛﻮان و ‪ٍ 10‬‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺤﺪد‪.
PAGE 50
‫وﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة‬ ‫‪ .1‬اﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ »ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮا اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ«‬ ‫• اﻟﺴﻄﻮع ] [‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ درﺟﺔ اﻟﺴﻄﻮع‪.‬‬ ‫• دﻗﺔ اﻟﺤﺠﻢ ] [‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﺪﻗﺔ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ 128x96‬و ‪ 176x144‬و ‪208x160‬‬ ‫• اﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ] [‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ وﻗﺖ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ اﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎط‬ ‫ﺛﻮان(‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻠﺘﻘﻂ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺛﻮان أو ‪ٍ 10‬‬ ‫ﺛﻮان أو ‪ٍ 5‬‬ ‫)إﻳﻘﺎف أو ‪ٍ 3‬‬ ‫اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﻌﺪ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ اﻟﻤﺤﺪد‪.‬‬ ‫• اﻟﺠﻮدة ] [‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮدة اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ أي ﻣﻦ‬ ‫اﻹﻋﺪادات ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ودﻗﻴﻖ ودﻗﻴﻖ ﺟ ًﺪا‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻮازن اﻟﻠﻮن اﻷﺑﻴﺾ ] [‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ اﻹﻋﺪادات‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺐ اﻷﺟﻮاء اﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪.
PAGE 51
‫وﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺠﻞ اﻟﺼﻮت‬ ‫]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[3-4‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻴﺰة ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ اﻟﺘﺬﻛﻴﺮ اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫‪ 10‬رﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ وﺗﺼﻞ ﻣﺪة ﻛﻞ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺗﺬﻛﻴﺮ إﻟﻰ ‪15‬‬ ‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫وﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة |‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮت‬ ‫‪50‬‬ ‫]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[1-3-4‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺬﻛﺮة ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮات اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮد ﺑﺪء اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض رﺳﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫واﻟﻮﻗﺖ اﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬إذا أردت إﻧﻬﺎء اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >)ﺣﻔﻆ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬اﻛﺘﺐ ﻋﻨﻮان ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ اﻟﺘﺬﻛﻴﺮ اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫>)ﺗﻢ(‪.
PAGE 52
‫! ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮًا ﻟﺼﻐﺮ أﺑﻌﺎد ﻣﻜﺒﺮ اﻟﺼﻮت‪ ،‬ﻓﻔﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻷﺣﻴﺎن ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮن‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻮﺷﺎ‪ ،‬وﻻ ﺳﻴﻤﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ أﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻮت‬ ‫ﻟﻪ وﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮن ﻫﻨﺎك أﺻﻮات ﺟﻬﻴﺮ ﻛﺜﻴﺮة‪ .‬وﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺻﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎت اﻟﺮأس اﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﺴﻨﻰ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮ اﻟﺠﻮدة‬ ‫اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﻊ إﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫وﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة‬ ‫ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪ KG320‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪ MP3‬ﻣﺪﻣﺞ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎع إﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪ MP3‬اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮدة‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ذاﻛﺮة اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ رأس ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻘﺔ أو ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﻼل ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺻﻮت داﺧﻠﻲ‪.
PAGE 53
‫وﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة‬ ‫! ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪ KG320‬اﻟﻤﻌﺪل اﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪ .AAC‬وﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ اﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ MP3‬إﻟﻰ ‪.AAC‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪ MP3‬ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎز ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻖ إﻟﻰ ذاﻛﺮة‬ ‫اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻣﻴﺰة ذاﻛﺮة اﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ‪.USB‬‬ ‫وﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة |‬ ‫! ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫‪52‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ "ذاﻛﺮة اﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ" إﻻ ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ "اﻟﺴﻜﻮن"‪.‬‬ ‫• وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ذاﻛﺮة اﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ‪ USB‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ان ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻈﺎﻣﻲ‬ ‫‪ Windows 2000‬و ‪windowsXP‬‬ ‫• اﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻋﺪم إزاﻟﺔ اﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ أﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ اﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت‪ .
PAGE 54
‫اﻹﻋﺪادات‬ ‫• اﻛﻮﻟﻴﺰر‬ ‫]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[3-4-4‬‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺘﻮي اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 5‬إﻋﺪادات ُﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ اﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻟﻤﻮازن‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻮت )اﻛﻮﻟﻴﺰر(‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﺪﺧﻮل إﻟﻰ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﻋﺮض اﻹﻋﺪادات وﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺣﺴﺐ رﻏﺒﺘﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫• وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪" :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫اﻟﻜﻞ"‪" ،‬ﺗﻜﺮار اﻟﻜﻞ"‪" ،‬ﺗﻜﺮار واﺣﺪ"‪.‬‬ ‫وﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة‬ ‫‪ .1‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ،MP3‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪد ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪.MP3‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻳﺴﺮ >]ﺧﻴﺎرات[‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮل إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﻮاﺋﻢ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﺮض اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ آﺧﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪.
PAGE 55
‫وﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة‬ ‫• ﻋﺸﻮاﺋﻲ‬ ‫إذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﺨﻴﺎر "ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ"‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻴﻨﺌ ٍﺬ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﺴﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ اﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﺸﻮاﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫وﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة |‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺑﺼﺮي‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ اﻟﻤﺮﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪ LCD‬اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ أﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪:MP3‬‬ ‫ﺿﻮء أو وﺛﺒﺔ أو ﻋﺎزف ﺟﻴﺘﺎر‪.‬‬ ‫‪54‬‬ ‫! ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺤﻘﻮق اﻟﻄﺒﻊ واﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ اﻻﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺎت‬ ‫اﻟﺪوﻟﻴﺔ وﻗﻮاﻧﻴﻦ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺣﻘﻮق اﻟﻄﺒﻊ واﻟﻨﺸﺮ اﻟﻘﻮﻣﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻠﺰم اﻟﺤﺼﻮل ﻋﻠﻰ إذن أو ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻹﻋﺎدة إﻧﺘﺎج اﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬ ‫أو ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ‪ .
PAGE 56
‫•‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻌﺮض أﻟﺒﻮم اﻟﺼﻮر اﻟﺼﻮر اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ اﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮا اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫! ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[6-4‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮض ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎح "ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ" أو ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ "ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ" ﻣﻦ‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ "ﺧﻴﺎرات"‪.‬‬ ‫وﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة‬ ‫• إﻋﺎدة ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ اﺳﻢ اﻟﺼﻮرة‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺬف ﻛﻞ اﻟﺼﻮر‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬف ﻛﻞ اﻟﺼﻮر ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ‬ ‫اﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت‪ :‬ﻋﺮض اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮرة‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪.
PAGE 57
‫اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪة‬ ‫]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[1-5‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ‪SMS‬‬ ‫)ﺧﺪﻣﺔ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮة( و ‪) MMS‬ﺧﺪﻣﺔ رﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪدة( واﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ إﻟﻰ رﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ |‬ ‫ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪56‬‬ ‫]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[1-1-5‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ وﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ واﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﺪد ﺻﻔﺤﺎت اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬أدﺧﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪة ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح‬ ‫اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻳﺴﺮ >]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬إذا ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪة‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺪد "ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ‬ ‫رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 58
‫•‬ ‫اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫•‬ ‫|‬ ‫ ﺻﻮت‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ إدراج اﻷﺻﻮات اﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬‫اﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮة‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻧﻤﺎذج ﻧﺼﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﻨﻤﺎذج اﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ‬‫اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮدة ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺳﺠﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ أرﻗﺎم اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ أو ﻋﻨﺎوﻳﻦ‬‫اﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ اﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻲ اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮدة ﻓﻲ دﻓﺘﺮ اﻟﻌﻨﺎوﻳﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ رﻣﺰ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﺮوف ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪.‬‬‫ اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﻊ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺿﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﻊ اﻟﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺣﻔﻆ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﻮدات‪ :‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﻮدات‪.‬‬ ‫• اﻟﺨﻂ واﻟﻤﺤﺎذاة‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ وﻧﻤﻂ اﻟﺨﻄﻮط‬ ‫وﻣﺤﺎذاة اﻟﻨﺺ‪.
PAGE 59
‫اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫! ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﺬي ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪ EMS 5‬ﻳﻜﻮن ﻣﺘﺎ ًﺣﺎ ﺑﻪ إﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫إرﺳﺎل ﺻﻮر ﻣﻠﻮﻧﺔ وأﺻﻮات وأﻧﻤﺎط اﻟﻨﺺ‪ ،‬وﻣﺎ إﻟﻰ ذﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﻄﺮف اﻵﺧﺮ اﻟﺼﻮر أو اﻷﺻﻮات أو أﻧﻤﺎط اﻟﻨﺺ اﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫أرﺳﻠﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ إذا ﻛﺎن اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬه‬ ‫اﻟﺨﻴﺎرات‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ |‬ ‫ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ وﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪد ة‬ ‫‪58‬‬ ‫]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[2-1-5‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ أن ﺗﺤﺘﻮي رﺳﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪدة ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻧﺺ و‪/‬أو ﺻﻮر و‪/‬أو ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺻﻮت‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻫﺬه‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻴﺰة إﻻ إذا ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ُﻣﺸﻐﱢﻞ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ أو‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻓﺮ اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ .
PAGE 60
‫• ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ رﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪدة اﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫أﻧﺸﺄﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺣﻔﻆ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ رﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪدة ﻓﻲ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺴﻮدات أو ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻛﻨﻤﺎذج‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ اﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮع‪ :‬ﻳﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ رﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪدة اﻟﺘﻲ اﺧﺘﺮﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫! ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫آﻟﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺼﺎدر ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ً‬ ‫ﻓﺸﻞ اﻹرﺳﺎل‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫|‬ ‫• إدﺧﺎل‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻮر ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮاﻓﻴﺔ وﺻﻮر وأﺻﻮات‬ ‫وﺟﻬﺎت اﺗﺼﺎل ورﻣﺰ وﺻﻮرة ﺟﺪﻳﺪة وﻣﺬﻛﺮة ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ وﻗﻮاﻟﺐ‬ ‫ﻧﺼﻴﺔ وﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ أﻋﻤﺎل‪.
PAGE 61
‫اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫أﻳﻀﺎ إﻟﻐﺎء‬ ‫• ﻟﻐﺎت ‪ :T9‬ﺣﺪد ﻟﻐﺔ وﺿﻊ إدﺧﺎل ‪ .T9‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ وﺿﻊ إدﺧﺎل ‪ T9‬ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ إﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪.T9‬‬ ‫• ﺧﺮوج‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫! ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ |‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮرة )‪ 15‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ( أﺛﻨﺎء ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪدة‪ ،‬ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮق وﻗﺖ اﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺣﻮاﻟﻲ ‪ 15‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ اﻷﻗﻞ‪ .‬وﻋﻼوة ﻋﻠﻰ ذﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ أي ﻣﻔﺘﺎح أﺛﻨﺎء‬ ‫وﻗﺖ اﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ‪ .‬وﺑﻌﺪ ‪ 15‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮن ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫وﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة‪.
PAGE 62
‫•‬ ‫اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫• رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ‪SIM‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻨﻲ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ‪ SIM‬اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SIM‬‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ اﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫وﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪدة اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ اﻹﺧﻄﺎر‬ ‫ﺑﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ اﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎر ﻟﺤﻴﻦ اﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫وﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻘﺮاءة رﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪدﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬ ‫>‪.‬‬ ‫|‬ ‫إذا ﻋﺮض اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ »ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ‪، «SIM‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﺣﺬف ﺑﻌﺾ رﺳﺎﺋﻞ ‪ SIM‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﻮارد‪ .
PAGE 63
‫اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ |‬ ‫ﻣﺴﻮدات‬ ‫‪62‬‬ ‫]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[3-5‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮض ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﻮدة‪ .‬ﺗﻨﻘﻞ ﺧﻼل اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ وﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪ .‬وﻛﻞ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺴﻮدة ﺗﺤﺘﻮي ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫اﻟﺨﻴﺎرات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ اﻟﺨﻴﺎرات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﺮض‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮض رﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪدة‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎرة‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺬف‪ :‬ﺣﺬف اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎرة‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت‪ :‬ﻟﻌﺮض ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺬف اﻟﻜﻞ‪ :‬ﻟﺤﺬف ﻛﻞ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮدة ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪.
PAGE 64
‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮد ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬ ‫اﻷﻳﺴﺮ >]ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ[ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺎع إﻟﻰ اﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ‬ ‫أﻳﻀﺎ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮار ﻓﻲ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎح ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬ ‫اﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎر ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺎع إﻟﻰ اﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫! ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺎع اﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻰ‬ ‫]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[5-5‬‬ ‫)ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻫﺬا ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ واﻻﺷﺘﺮاك(‬ ‫رﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻫﻲ رﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﺳﻠﻬﺎ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫إﻟﻰ‪ .GSM‬وﺗﻘﺪم ﻫﺬه اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻘﺎرﻳﺮ‬ ‫اﻟﻄﻘﺲ وأﺧﺒﺎر اﻟﻤﺮور واﻟﻤﻮاﺻﻼت واﻟﺼﻴﺪﻟﻴﺎت وأﺳﻌﺎر‬ ‫اﻷﺳﻬﻢ واﻟﺴﻨﺪات‪ .
PAGE 65
‫اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺮاءة اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[1-6-5‬‬ ‫اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ |‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻋﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﻼﻣﻚ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت وﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫» ﻗﺮاءة « ﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻗﺮاءة رﺳﺎﻟﺔ أﺧﺮى ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل اﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ‬ ‫‪R ، L‬أو ﻣﻔﺘﺎح >]اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺗﻈﻞ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻌﺮوﺿﺔ ﻟﺤﻴﻦ اﺳﺘﻼم رﺳﺎﻟﺔ أﺧﺮى‪.‬‬ ‫‪64‬‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎت‬ ‫)ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻫﺬا ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ واﻻﺷﺘﺮاك(‬ ‫]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[2-6-5‬‬ ‫• إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ أرﻗﺎم رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻓﻲ ذاﻛﺮة اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻊ اﻻﺳﻢ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺎر‬ ‫اﻟﺨﺎص ﺑﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 66
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻧﻤﻮذج ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﺨﻴﺎرات‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺬف‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬف ﻧﻤﺎذج اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪدة‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﺮض‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ رؤﻳﺔ ﻧﻤﺎذج اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪدة‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺬف‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬف ﻧﻤﺎذج اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪدة‪.‬‬ ‫رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ‬ ‫]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[1-8-5‬‬ ‫• أﻧﻮاع اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪ :‬ﻧﺺ وﺻﻮت وﻓﺎﻛﺲ واﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎء ﻣﺤﻠﻲ و‬ ‫‪ X 400‬وﺑﺮﻳﺪ إﻟﻴﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻲ و ‪ERMES‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎدة ﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮن ﻧﻮع اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫اﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ إﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎت‬ ‫أﺧﺮى‪ .‬اﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺰود اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺪى ﺗﻮﻓﺮ‬ ‫ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.
PAGE 67
‫اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ |‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪66‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮة اﻟﺼﻼﺣﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻫﺬه ﺑﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﺪة ﺣﻔﻆ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ اﻟﺘﺴﻠﻴﻢ‪ :‬إذا ﺿﺒﻄﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻌﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ إذا ﻣﺎ ﻛﺎن ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ إرﺳﺎل رﺳﺎﻟﺘﻚ ﺑﻨﺠﺎح ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻣﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺮد ﻋﺒﺮ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ إرﺳﺎل رﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﻠﻢ اﻟﺮد ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ اﻟﺮد ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺗﻮرة ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ‪ :SMS‬إذا أردت إرﺳﺎل اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻼم ﻋﻨﻮان أو ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ‪ SMS‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل ﻫﺬه اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.
PAGE 68
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺳﺘﻼم اﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ إذا ﻛﺎن ﻣﺰود ﺧﺪﻣﺔ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻤﻴﺰة‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ورود ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫اﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬اﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﺔ ﻣﺰود ﺧﺪﻣﺔ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ وﻓﻘﺎً ﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎع إﻟﻰ اﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺒﻜﺘﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻌﻢ‪ :‬إذا ﺣﺪدت ﻫﺬه اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺴﺘﻠﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ‪ :‬اذا ﺣﺪدت ﻫﺬه اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻠﻘﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ رﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﺑﻌﺪ ذﻟﻚ‪.
PAGE 69
‫اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫• اﻟﻠﻐﺎت‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﻠﻐﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬إﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ[‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ذﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض رﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻐﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﺪدﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫رﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻟﺪﻓﻊ‬ ‫]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[5-8-5‬‬ ‫اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ |‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ اﻟﺨﻴﺎرات ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺴﻠﻢ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ أو ﻋﺪم ﺗﺴﻠﻤﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 70
‫اﺷﻴﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺮض ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻤﻠﻔﺎت ‪) 3GP، MP4‬ﺑﺤﺪ أﻗﺼﻰ ‪ (208x160‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪/‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ذاﻛﺮة اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪدة‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎح "ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ" أو ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ "ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ" ﺿﻤﻦ‬ ‫ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ ﺧﻴﺎرات‪.‬‬ ‫• إرﺳﺎل ﻋﺒﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮث‪ :‬إرﺳﺎل اﻟﻤﻠﻒ اﻟﻤﺤﺪد إﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎز آﺧﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﺒﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮث‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﺎدة ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ اﺳﻢ اﻟﻤﻠﻒ اﻟﻤﺤﺪد‪ .‬اﻟﺤﺪ اﻷﻗﺼﻰ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺪد اﻷﺣﺮف ﻫﻮ ‪ 34‬ﺣﺮف‪ .‬وﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ اﻣﺘﺪاد اﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.
PAGE 71
‫اﺷﻴﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫اﺷﻴﺎﺋﻲ |‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪70‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫إرﺳﺎل ﻋﺒﺮ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪدة‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ إرﺳﺎل‬ ‫رﺳﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪدة ﻣﻊ ﺻﻮرة‪.‬‬ ‫إرﺳﺎل ﻋﺒﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮث‪ :‬إرﺳﺎل اﻟﻤﻠﻒ اﻟﻤﺤﺪد ﻟﺠﻬﺎز آﺧﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮث‪.‬‬ ‫إﻋﺎدة ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ اﺳﻢ اﻟﻤﻠﻒ اﻟﻤﺤﺪد‪ .‬أﻗﺼﻰ ﻃﻮل‬ ‫ﻣﺴﻤﻮح ﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪد اﻷﺣﺮف ﻫﻮ ‪ 34‬ﺣﺮﻓًﺎ‪ .‬وﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫اﻣﺘﺪاد اﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬف‪ :‬ﺣﺬف ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬف اﻟﻜﻞ‪ :‬ﺣﺬف ﻛﻞ اﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮدة ﻓﻲ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت‪ :‬ﻋﺮض ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.
PAGE 72
‫اﺷﻴﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺮض ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪ MP3‬و ‪ MP4‬و ‪ AAC‬و ‪ M4A‬و ‪ WMA‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪/‬اﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺑﺬاﻛﺮة اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪدة‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎح "ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ" أو ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ "ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ" ﺿﻤﻦ ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎرات‪.‬‬ ‫• إرﺳﺎل ﻋﺒﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮث‪ :‬إرﺳﺎل اﻟﻤﻠﻒ اﻟﻤﺤﺪد إﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎز آﺧﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﺒﺮ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮث‪.‬‬ ‫• إﻋﺎدة ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ اﺳﻢ اﻟﻤﻠﻒ اﻟﻤﺤﺪد‪ .‬أﻗﺼﻰ ﻃﻮل‬ ‫ﻣﺴﻤﻮح ﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪد اﻷﺣﺮف ﻫﻮ ‪ 34‬ﺣﺮﻓًﺎ‪ .‬وﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫اﻣﺘﺪاد اﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺬف‪ :‬ﺣﺬف ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‪.
PAGE 73
‫اﺷﻴﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻧﺺ‬ ‫]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[6-6‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮض ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻤﻠﻔﺎت ‪ TXT‬ﻓﻲ اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪/‬اﻟﻨﺼﻮص ﻓﻲ ذاﻛﺮة‬ ‫اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪدة‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﺮض‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮض ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ TXT‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح‬ ‫"ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ" أو ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ "ﻋﺮض" ﺿﻤﻦ ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ ﺧﻴﺎرات‪.‬‬ ‫! ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫اﺷﻴﺎﺋﻲ |‬ ‫أﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪ TXT‬اﻟﺬي ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻫﻮ ‪ 460‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪72‬‬ ‫إرﺳﺎل ﻋﺒﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮث‪ :‬إرﺳﺎل اﻟﻤﻠﻒ اﻟﻤﺤﺪد ﻟﺠﻬﺎز آﺧﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮث‪.‬‬ ‫إﻋﺎدة ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ اﺳﻢ اﻟﻤﻠﻒ اﻟﻤﺤﺪد‪ .‬أﻗﺼﻰ ﻃﻮل‬ ‫ﻣﺴﻤﻮح ﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪد اﻷﺣﺮف ﻫﻮ ‪ 34‬ﺣﺮﻓًﺎ‪ .
PAGE 74
‫اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮر اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎر‪.‬‬ ‫اﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ‬ ‫]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[1-1-7‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ إﺣﺪى اﻟﺼﻮر أو اﻟﺮﺳﻮم اﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ L،D ،U‬أو ‪.R‬‬ ‫اﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ اﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‬ ‫]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[2-1-7‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ إﺣﺪى اﻟﺼﻮر أو اﻟﺮﺳﻮم اﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻟﺘﻜﻮن ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫رﺳﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺘﺮﺣﻴﺐ‬ ‫]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[3-7‬‬ ‫إذا ﺣﺪث ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ اﻟﻨﺺ اﻟﺬي ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎر‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﻮء اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[4-7‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺪة إﺿﺎءة اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺪاﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 75
‫اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫اﺳﻢ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[6-7‬‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻤﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎرة ﻗﺒﻞ ﻓﺘﺢ‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ .‬اﻟﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺧﺘﺼﺎرات اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[7-7‬‬ ‫اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ |‬ ‫اذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﺧﺘﺼﺎرات اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪة‬ ‫وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﺳﻬﻢ اﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ اﻻرﺑﻌﺔ وﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻛﺼﻮرة ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺴﻜﻮن‪.‬‬ ‫‪74‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮن رﻗﻢ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل‬ ‫]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[8-7‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﻦ اﻻرﻗﺎم اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮم ﺑﻜﺘﺎﺑﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻻﺟﺮاء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.
PAGE 76
‫اﻷوﺿﺎع‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻷوﺿﺎع‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ "اﻷوﺿﺎع"‪ ،‬اﻧﺘﻘﻞ إﻟﻰ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﺬي ﺗﺮﻏﺐ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻄﻪ واﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬ ‫>]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[ أو ﻣﻔﺘﺎح "ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ"‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪد "ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ"‪.‬‬ ‫اﻷوﺿﺎع‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ‬ ‫]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[1-X-8‬‬ ‫اﻧﺘﻘﻞ إﻟﻰ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮب ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ "اﻷوﺿﺎع"‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻳﺴﺮ >أو ﻣﻔﺘﺎح‬ ‫"ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ"‪ ،‬ﺣﺪد "ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ"‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺧﻴﺎر ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺨﻴﺎر ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻨﺤﻮ اﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮب‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻧﻮع اﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ اﻟﻮارد‪ :‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻮع اﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻟﻠﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﻮاردة‪.
PAGE 77
‫اﻷوﺿﺎع‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫اﻷوﺿﺎع |‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪76‬‬ ‫ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺢ اﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪ :‬ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ اﻟﻐﻄﺎء‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام‪.‬‬ ‫درﺟﺔ ﺻﻮت اﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪ :‬ﺿﺒﻂ درﺟﺔ ﺻﻮت اﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫درﺟﺔ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬اﻹﻳﻘﺎف‪ :‬ﺿﺒﻂ درﺟﺔ ﺻﻮت‬ ‫ﻧﻐﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬إﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺠﻮال‪.‬‬ ‫رد ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻮن ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻣﻮﺻﻼً ﺑﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ اﻟﺮأس أو ﻃﻘﻢ ﺣﺮ اﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ إﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺮد اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً‪.‬‬‫ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ 5‬ﺛﻮان‪ :‬ﺳﻴﺮد اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ 5‬ﺛﻮان‪.
PAGE 78
‫أدوات‬ ‫! ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ SMS‬و‪ MMS‬و‪ MP3‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻔﻀﻼﺗﻚ‬ ‫اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ اﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ‬ ‫]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[2-9‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ إﻋﺪاد ‪ 5‬أوﻗﺎت ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺒﻪ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ اﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫وﻗﺖ ﻣﺤﺪد‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺣﺪد ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ وأدﺧﻞ وﻗﺖ إﻃﻼق اﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ اﻟﺬي ﺗﺮﻳﺪه‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮث‬ ‫]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[3-9‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮث إﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ اﺗﺼﺎل أﺟﻬﺰة اﻟﺠﻮال‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺘﻮاﻓﻘﺔ ووﺣﺪاﺗﻬﺎ اﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ وأﺟﻬﺰة اﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮدة‬ ‫ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺎ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮة‪.
PAGE 79
‫أدوات‬ ‫أدوات |‬ ‫! ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫‪78‬‬ ‫• إذا اﺳﺘﻌﻤﻠﺖ ‪ pcsync‬ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ اﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮث‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ أن‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺎدل اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﺿﻤﻦ ﺳﺠﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎز آﺧﺮ ﻣﺰود ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮث‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﻄﺎﻟﺒﻚ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪ .‬وﺑﻌﺪ اﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻨﻘﻞ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﺴﺦ اﻟﻤﻠﻒ إﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ اﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺴﺐ‬ ‫ﻧﻮع اﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪:‬‬ ‫ ‪ :(.mp3، mp4، aac، m4a، wma) MP3‬ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‬‫اﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )‪ :(.3GP‬ﻣﺠﻠﺪ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬‫ ﺟﻬﺎت اﻻﺗﺼﺎل اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺪﻟﻴﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ )‪ :(.VCF‬دﻟﻴﻞ‬‫اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ اﻟﻨﺺ )‪ :(.txt‬ﻣﺠﻠﺪ اﻟﻨﺺ‪.
PAGE 80
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ أﺟﻬﺰة ﺟﺪﻳﺪة ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮث‪.‬‬ ‫وإذا ﻛﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ أﺿﻔﺖ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪ ,‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺈدﺧﺎل ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﻤﺮور‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮث‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮث أو إﻟﻐﺎؤﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫أدوات‬ ‫• رؤﻳﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﺠﻌﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ً‬ ‫أﺟﻬﺰة ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮث اﻷﺧﺮى‪.‬‬ ‫• اﺳﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ اﺳﻢ ﺟﻬﺎز ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮث‪ .‬اﻻﺳﻢ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ﻫﻮ‬ ‫‪.LG KG320‬‬ ‫|‬ ‫إذا دﺧﻠﺖ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ”أﺟﻬﺰﺗﻲ” أو “أﺟﻬﺰة ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ اﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ”‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫اﻟﻮﺻﻮل إﻟﻰ اﻟﺨﻴﺎرات ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.
PAGE 81
‫أدوات‬ ‫اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎت اﻟﻤﺪﻋﻤﺔ‬ ‫]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[4-3-9‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮث ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺳﺒﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﺜﺎل ﻧﻘﻞ اﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت وﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ اﻟﺼﻮر وﻣﺰاﻣﻨﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ وﻣﺎ إﻟﻰ ذﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻮدم‬ ‫]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[4-9‬‬ ‫أدوات |‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﻮﺻﻮل إﻟﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎت اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ اﻟﻤﻮدم‪ .‬إذا اردت‬ ‫إﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎل ‪ ،Pcsync،Contents banks، Internet Cube‬ﻳﺠﺐ‬ ‫أن ﺗﺪﺧﻞ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ّ‬ ‫وﺗﻨﺸﻂ اﻟﻤﻮدم وﺑﻌﺪ ذﻟﻚ ﻳﺮﺑﻂ ﺳﻠﻚ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 82
‫اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ‬ ‫]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[7-9‬‬ ‫اﻟﺮد اﻵﻟﻲ‬ ‫]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[8-9‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ وﺿﻊ ﺟﻬﺎ زك ﻟﻠﺮد اﻻ ﻟﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎم‬ ‫]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[1-8-9‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺮد اﻻﻟﻰ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﺎم‪..‬‬ ‫اﺟﺘﻤﺎع‬ ‫]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[2-8-9‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺮد اﻻﻟﻰ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ اﺟﺘﻤﺎع‪.‬‬ ‫أدوات‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ أي ﻗﻴﺎس إﻟﻰ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﺎك ‪9‬‬ ‫أﻧﻮاع ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ إﻟﻰ وﺣﺪات‪" :‬اﻟﻌﻤﻠﺔ" و"اﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ"‬ ‫و"اﻟﻄﻮل" و"اﻟﻮزن" و"درﺟﺔ اﻟﺤﺮارة" و"اﻟﺤﺠﻢ"‬ ‫و"اﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ" و"اﺣﺬﻳﺔ" و"ﻣﻼﺑﺲ"‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ أﺣﺪ أﻧﻮاع اﻟﻮﺣﺪات اﻟﺘﺴﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎح >]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[‪.
PAGE 83
‫أدوات‬ ‫ﻗﻴﺎدة‬ ‫]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[3-8-9‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺮد اﻻﻟﻰ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﻗﻴﺎدة‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺪد ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪم ‪2‬‬ ‫]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[5/4-8-9‬‬ ‫أدوات |‬ ‫اﻻﻣﻜﺎن ﻋﻤﻞ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ رد ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ دﻟﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪82‬‬ ‫اﻟﻘﻮاﺋﻢ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫• ّ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﻴﻂ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ اﻟﺮد اﻵﻟﻲ اﻟﺬي اﺧﺘﺮﺗﻪ‬ ‫• ﺳﻤﺎع اﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬ ‫اﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻺﺳﺘﻤﺎع إﻟﻰ دﻟﻴﻞ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.
PAGE 84
‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ 5‬ﺛﻮاﻧﻲ‪ :‬ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ 5‬ﺛﻮاﻧﻲ ﺳﻴﻘﻮم ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ّ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ إﻟﺮد‬ ‫اﻵﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ 10‬ﺛﻮاﻧﻲ‪ :‬ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ 10‬ﺛﻮاﻧﻲ ﺳﻴﻘﻮم ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ّ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ‬ ‫إﻟﺮد اﻵﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪SIM‬‬ ‫]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[9-9‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎت ‪ SIM‬واﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫أدوات‬ ‫|‬ ‫! ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• إذا ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺧﺪﻣﺎت ‪) SAT‬ﻣﺜﻞ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ أدوات ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎت ‪ ،(SIM‬ﻓﺴﺘﻜﻮن ﻫﺬه اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺒﺎرة ﻋﻦ اﺳﻢ اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ اﻟﺨﺎص ﺑﺎﻟ ُﻤﺸﻐﱢﻞ اﻟﻤﺨﺰن ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.SIM‬‬ ‫• إذا ﻟﻢ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﺧﺪﻣﺎت ‪ ،SAT‬ﻓﺴﺘﻜﻮن ﻫﺬه‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﺒﺎرة ﻋﻦ اﻷوﺿﺎع‪.
PAGE 85
‫اﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ |‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ‬ ‫‪84‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﻮﺻﻮل إﻟﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎت ‪ WAP‬اﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ )ﺑﺮوﺗﻮﻛﻮل‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ اﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ( ﻣﺜﻞ اﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻼت اﻟﻤﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ واﻷﺧﺒﺎر‬ ‫وﺗﻘﺎرﻳﺮ اﻟﻄﻘﺲ وﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻋﻦ اﻟﺮﺣﻼت اﻟﺠﻮﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﻫﺬه اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺧﺼﻴﺼﺎً ﻟﻠﻬﻮاﺗﻒ اﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ وﻳﺘﻢ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺘﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﺰودي ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪.WAP‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮاﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺎت ‪ WAP‬واﻷﺳﻌﺎر واﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻔﺎت ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ اﻟﺨﺎص ﺑﻚ و‪/‬أو ﻣﺰود اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ اﻟﺬي ﺗﺮﻏﺐ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺧﺪﻣﺘﻪ‪ .‬ﺳﻮف ﻳﻌﻄﻴﻚ أﻳﻀﺎً ﻣﺰودي اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫إرﺷﺎدات ﻋﻦ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎت اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﻢ‪.
PAGE 86
‫اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ *‪[1-‬‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮن اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻫﻲ اﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ اﻟﺬي ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪه ﻓﻲ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﻨﺸﻂ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﺰود اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ إذا ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ أﺣﺪ‬ ‫اﻷوﺿﺎع‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎء إﺷﺎرة ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ .1‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻷﻳﺴﺮ >]ﺧﻴﺎرات[‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪد "إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ" واﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح "ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ"‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺑﻌﺪ إدﺧﺎل ﻋﻨﻮان ‪ URL‬اﻟﻤﺮاد وﻋﻨﻮاﻧﻪ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎح "”ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻹﺷﺎرة اﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ اﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻮاﻓﺮ اﻟﺨﻴﺎرات‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• اﺗﺼﺎل‪ :‬ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ اﻟﻤﺤﺪدة‪.
PAGE 87
‫اﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ‬ ‫• ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﻮان ‪ URL‬و‪/‬أو ﻋﻨﻮان اﻹﺷﺎرة‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ اﻟﻤﺤﺪدة‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺬف‪ :‬ﺣﺬف اﻹﺷﺎرة اﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ اﻟﻤﺤﺪدة‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺬف اﻟﻜﻞ‪ :‬ﺣﺬف ﻛﺎﻓﺔاﻹﺷﺎرات اﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺬﻫﺎب اﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﻮان اﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‬ ‫]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ *‪[3-‬‬ ‫اﻹﻋﺪادات‬ ‫]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ *‪[4-‬‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ |‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮة ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ اﻟﺬي ﺗﺮﻳﺪه‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ إدﺧﺎل‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮان ‪ URL‬ﻣﺤﺪد‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح "ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ"‬ ‫‪86‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ واﻟﺬاﻛﺮة اﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺔ وﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ‬ ‫اﻻرﺗﺒﺎط واﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ اﻟﻤﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﺑﺨﺪﻣﺔ اﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.
PAGE 88
‫اﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ‬ ‫|‬ ‫ اﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت‪.‬‬‫‪ 1‬اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت‬ ‫‪GPRS 2‬‬ ‫ إﻋﺪادات اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت‪ :‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ إذا ﺣﺪدت إﻋﺪادات‬‫اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻛﺤﺎﻣﻞ ‪ /‬ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻮﻳﺔ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪم‪ :‬أدﺧﻞ رﻗﻢ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﺬي ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬ ‫اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﻪ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮل ﻟﻌﺒﺎرة ‪ WAP‬اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺮف اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪم‪ :‬ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ ﺧﺎدم اﻻﺗﺼﺎل‬ ‫)وﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻋﺒﺎرة ‪(WAP‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﻤﺮور‪ :‬ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﻤﺮور اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻄﻠﺒﻬﺎ ﺧﺎدم اﻻﺗﺼﺎل‬ ‫)وﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻋﺒﺎرة ‪ (WAP‬ﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻔﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮع اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ :‬ﺣﺪد ﻧﻮع ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت‪ .
PAGE 89
‫اﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ |‬ ‫ إﻋﺪادات ‪DNS‬‬‫اﻟﻤﻠﻘﻢ اﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪ :‬اﻛﺘﺐ ﻋﻨﻮان ‪ IP‬ﻟﻤﻠﻘﻢ ‪DNS‬‬ ‫اﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ اﻟﺬي ﺗﻘﻮم ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮل إﻟﻴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻠﻘﻢ اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮي‪ :‬اﻛﺘﺐ ﻋﻨﻮان ‪ IP‬ﻟﻤﻠﻘﻢ ‪ DNS‬اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮي‬ ‫اﻟﺬي ﺗﻘﻮم ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮل إﻟﻴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫• إﻋﺎدة ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ اﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺬف‪ :‬ﺣﺬف ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﻤﺤﺪد ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• إﺿﺎﻓﺔ اﺳﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪88‬‬ ‫اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة اﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺔ‬ ‫]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ *‪[2-4-‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت أو اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎت اﻟﺘﻲ اﻃﻠﻌﺖ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة اﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺔ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.
PAGE 90
‫اﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ *‪[6-4-‬‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ‬ ‫|‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻤﺮاﺟﻊ اﻟﺘﺼﺪﻳﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺷﻬﺎدات اﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺷﻬﺎدات‬ ‫اﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ اﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫• اﻟﺸﻬﺎدات اﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺷﻬﺎدات‬ ‫اﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ اﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ اﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪.
PAGE 91
‫ﺳﺠﻞ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺳﺠﻞ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ اﻟﺮد ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫واﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﻮاردة واﻟﺼﺎدرة ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ دﻋﻢ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ اﻟﺨﻂ اﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ )‪ (CLI‬داﺧﻞ ﻧﻄﺎق‬ ‫اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺮﻗﻢ واﻻﺳﻢ )إن وﺟﺪ( ﻣﻊ ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ ووﻗﺖ إﺟﺮاء‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻋﺮض أوﻗﺎت اﻻﺗﺼﺎل‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺠﻞ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت |‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت ﻟﻢ ﻳﺮد ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪90‬‬ ‫]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[1-0‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺨﻴﺎر ﻋﺮض آﺧﺮ ‪ 10‬ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت ﻟﻢ ﻳُﺮد ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 92
‫ﻛﻞ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت‬ ‫]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[4-0‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺨﻴﺎر ﻋﺮض ﻛﻞ ﺳﺠﻼت اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬف اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﺤﺪﻳﺜﺔ‬ ‫]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[5-0‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺨﻴﺎر ﺣﺬف ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ "اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳُﺮد‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ" و"اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ"‪ .‬وﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬف ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت‬ ‫اﻟﺼﺎدرة وﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت دﻓﻌﺔ واﺣﺪة‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺨﻴﺎر ﻋﺮض ﻣﺪة اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﻮاردة واﻟﺼﺎدرة‪.‬‬ ‫وﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ إﻋﺎدة ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﻗﺘﺎت اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت‪.‬‬ ‫واﻟﻤﻮﻗﺘﺎت اﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻛﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫• آﺧﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻌﺮض ﻣﺪة آﺧﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.
PAGE 93
‫ﺳﺠﻞ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت‬ ‫ﻋﺮض ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[2-6-0‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺨﻴﺎر ﻓﺤﺺ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ آﺧﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ وﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت واﻟﺮﺻﻴﺪ اﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ وإﻋﺎدة ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ اﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ إدﺧﺎل رﻣﺰ ‪.PIN2‬‬ ‫ﻹﻋﺎدة ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ اﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ ُ‬ ‫ﺳﺠﻞ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت |‬ ‫اﻹﻋﺪادات‬ ‫)ﻳﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪)SIM‬‬ ‫‪92‬‬ ‫]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[3-6-0‬‬ ‫• ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻔﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻮع اﻟﻌﻤﻠﺔ وﺳﻌﺮ‬ ‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪ .‬اﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺰود اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮل ﻋﻠﻰ أﺳﻌﺎر‬ ‫وﺣﺪات اﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﻌﻤﻠﺔ أو اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬه‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻠﺰم إدﺧﺎل رﻣﺰ ‪.
PAGE 94
‫اﻻﻋﺪادات‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ‬ ‫• ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ‬ ‫‪#‬‬ ‫]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[1-1-‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ إدﺧﺎل اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺻﻴﻐﺔ اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺷﻬﺮ ‪ /‬ﺳﻨﺔ‬ ‫أو ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺷﻬﺮ ‪ /‬ﻳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺳﻨﺔ أو ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ /‬ﺷﻬﺮ ‪/‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮم‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫• ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫‪#‬‬ ‫]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[2-1-‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ إدﺧﺎل اﻟﻮﻗﺖ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺻﻴﻐﺔ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ إﻣﺎ ﺑﻨﻈﺎم ‪ 24‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ أو ‪12‬‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪.
PAGE 95
‫اﻻﻋﺪادات‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت‬ ‫‪#‬‬ ‫]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[1-4-‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت إﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ وﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﻔﺎﻛﺲ وﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻮاردة إﻟﻰ‬ ‫رﻗﻢ آﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮل ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬اﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺰود اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻛﻞ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺑﻼ ﺷﺮوط‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ اﻻﻧﺸﻐﺎل‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮن اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻻً‪.‬‬ ‫اﻻﻋﺪادات |‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪم اﻟﺮد‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺮد ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 96
‫أرﻗﺎم ﻣﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ آﺧﺮ ‪ 5‬أرﻗﺎم ﻣﺤﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• إﻟﻐﺎء‬ ‫إﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ اﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﺮض اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺮض ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ اﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻹرﺳﺎل ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻘﻲ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ‪]S‬إرﺳﺎل[ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫إرﺳﺎل رﻗﻤﻲ‬ ‫)اﺳﺘﻨﺎداً إﻟﻰ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ واﻻﺷﺘﺮاك(‬ ‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫‪#‬‬ ‫]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[3-4-‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ إرﺳﺎل رﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺑﻨﺎء‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ اﻟﺨﻄﻴﻦ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺧﻂ ‪ 1‬أو ﺧﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫اﻻﻋﺪادات‬ ‫ﻟﺮﻗﻢ آﺧﺮ‬ ‫إدﺧﺎل رﻗﻢ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ‪.
PAGE 97
‫اﻻﻋﺪادات‬ ‫• ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻹرﺳﺎل رﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ إﻟﻰ ﻃﺮف آﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض رﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫• إﻳﻘﺎف‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض رﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻧﺘﻈﺎر اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت‬ ‫)ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ(‬ ‫• ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ‬ ‫‪#‬‬ ‫]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[4-4-‬‬ ‫اﻻﻋﺪادات |‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ‪ ،‬ﻗﺒﻮل )ﺗﻠﻘﻲ( ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ اﻧﺘﻈﺎر‪.‬‬ ‫‪96‬‬ ‫• إﻟﻐﺎء‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ إﻟﻐﺎء‪ ،‬ﻗﺒﻮل )ﺗﻠﻘﻲ( ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ اﻧﺘﻈﺎر‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﺮض اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮض ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ اﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎر‪.
PAGE 98
‫ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻠﺐ رﻣﺰ ‪PIN‬‬ ‫اﻟﺨﺎص ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬إذا ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ‬ ‫ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ إدﺧﺎل رﻣﺰ ‪.PIN‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺣﺪد ﻃﻠﺐ رﻣﺰ ‪ PIN‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ >]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‪/‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ اﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫‪ .3‬إذا أردت ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ إﻋﺪادات اﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺤﺘﺎج إﻟﻰ رﻣﺰ ‪PIN‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬إذا أدﺧﻠﺖ رﻣﺰ ‪ PIN‬ﺧﻄﺄ ﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 3‬ﻣﺮات‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ‬ ‫اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬إذا ﻛﺎن رﻣﺰ ‪ PIN‬ﻣﺤﻈﻮراً‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ إدﺧﺎل رﻣﺰ ‪.
PAGE 99
‫اﻻﻋﺪادات‬ ‫ﺣﻈﺮ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت‬ ‫‪#‬‬ ‫]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[4-5-‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻨﻊ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺣﻈﺮ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻦ إﺟﺮاء أو ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﻓﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﻤﺮور‬ ‫اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺤﻈﺮ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮض اﻟﻘﻮاﺋﻢ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫اﻻﻋﺪادات |‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪98‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻛﻞ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﺼﺎدرة‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ اﻟﺤﻈﺮ ﻟﻜﻞ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﺼﺎدرة‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺪوﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ اﻟﺤﻈﺮ ﻟﻜﻞ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﺪوﻟﻴﺔ اﻟﺼﺎدرة‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺼﺎدرة اﻟﺪوﻟﻴﺔ أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﺘﺠﻮال‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ اﻟﺤﻈﺮ ﻟﻜﻞ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﺪوﻟﻴﺔ اﻟﺼﺎدرة ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻋﺪا‬ ‫اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮدة داﺧﻞ اﻟﺒﻠﺪ‪.
PAGE 100
‫• ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺼﺮ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﺼﺎدرة ﻋﻠﻰ أرﻗﺎم ﻫﻮاﺗﻒ ﻣﺤﺪدة‪.‬‬ ‫• إﻟﻐﺎء‬ ‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل اﻟﻤﺤﺪد‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻷرﻗﺎم‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮض ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻷرﻗﺎم اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻛﺮﻗﻢ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺤﺪد‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫‪#‬‬ ‫]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[6-‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ إﺣﺪى اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎت اﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ إﻣﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً‬ ‫أو ﻳﺪوﻳﺎً‪ ،‬ﻋﺎدة ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮع اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪#‬‬ ‫]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[1-6-‬‬ ‫اﻻﻋﺪادات‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺼﺮ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﺼﺎدرة ﻋﻠﻰ أرﻗﺎم ﻫﻮاﺗﻒ ﻣﺤﺪدة‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ اﻷرﻗﺎم ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ رﻣﺰ ‪.
PAGE 101
‫اﻻﻋﺪادات‬ ‫اﻻﻋﺪادات |‬ ‫• آﻟﻲ‬ ‫إذا ﺣﺪدت اﻟﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮف ﻳﺒﺤﺚ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً‬ ‫ﻋﻦ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ وﻳﺤﺪدﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮد أن ﺗﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ "ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ"‪،‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ "ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ" ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ أو إﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪100‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺪوي‬ ‫ﺳﻮف ﻳﺒﺤﺚ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎت اﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‬ ‫وﻳﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ذﻟﻚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪاﻣﻬﺎ إذا ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﺬه اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻬﺎ اﺗﻔﺎق ﺗﺠﻮال‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ اﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ أﺧﺮى إذا ﻓﺸﻞ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻮﺻﻮل إﻟﻰ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺤﺪدة‪.
PAGE 102
‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‬ ‫‪#‬‬ ‫]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[2-7-‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ إﻧﺸﺎء اﺗﺼﺎل ‪ GPRS‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﺨﺪﻣﺔ ‪ WAP‬وﻳﺘﻢ إﻧﻬﺎؤه ﻋﻨﺪ إﻧﻬﺎء اﺗﺼﺎل ‪.WAP‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة‬ ‫‪#‬‬ ‫إﻋﺎدة ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ‬ ‫‪#‬‬ ‫]اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪[8-‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ اﻟﺨﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺬاﻛﺮة واﻟﺬاﻛﺮة‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮدع وذاﻛﺮة ‪ .SIM‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎل‬ ‫إﻟﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮدع‪.‬‬ ‫اﻻﻋﺪادات‬ ‫ﻟﺒﺪء ﻛﻞ إﻋﺪادات اﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎج إﻟﻰ رﻣﺰ‬ ‫اﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.
PAGE 103
‫اﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎت‬ ‫ﻫﺬه اﻟﻘﻄﻊ اﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪة ﺣﺴﺐ ﺣﺎﺟﺘﻚ ﻣﻦ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎل‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎت |‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺳﻔﺮ‬ ‫ﻫﺬا اﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ‬ ‫اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﺧﻼل ﺗﻮاﺟﺪك ﺧﺎرج‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻨﺰل أو اﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫‪102‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎز ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت‪/‬ﻗﺮص ﻣﺪﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻮاﻟﻚ‬ ‫إﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺘﺒﺎدل‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻢ‪.
PAGE 104
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫اﺳﻢ اﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ‪KG320 :‬‬ ‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎ م ‪GSM 900 / DCS 1800 / PCS 1900 :‬‬ ‫درﺟﺔ اﻟﺤﺮارة اﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫|‬ ‫أﻗﺼﻰ ‪+55°C :‬‬ ‫أدﻧﻰ ‪-10°C :‬‬ ‫‪103‬‬
PAGE 105
104
PAGE 106
‫ﻓﺎرﺳ ‬ ‫‪ KG320‬دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ راﻫﻨﻤﺎى ﻛﺎرﺑﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺪ ﻦ وﺳ ﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ اﻃﻼع ﻛﺎرﺑﺮان ﻣ رﺳﺎﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺮم اﻓﺰار ﺗﻠﻔﻦ و اراﺋﻪ دﻫﻨﺪه ﺳﺮو ﺲ ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﻔﺎوﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ا ﻦ دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ‬ ‫راﻫﻨﻤﺎ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.
PAGE 107
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ |‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ‪5 ....................................................‬‬ ‫ﻧﻜﺎت ا ﻤﻨ ‪6 ..............................................‬‬ ‫دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺟﻬﺖ ا ﻤﻨ و اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺑﻬ‪$‬ﻨﻪ ‪7 ....‬‬ ‫و ﮋﮔ‪$‬ﻬﺎى ‪13 ...................................... KG320‬‬ ‫اﺟﺰاء ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‪13 .............................................................‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎى ﭘﺸﺖ ‪16 ............................................................‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎ ﺶ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ‪17 ......................................................
PAGE 108
‫ﭘ‪$‬ﻐﺎم ﻫﺎ‪53 .................................................‬‬ ‫ﭘ ﺎم ﺟﺪ ﺪ ]ﻣﻨﻮ ‪53.......................................................[1-5‬‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪوق در ﺎﻓﺖ ]ﻣﻨﻮ ‪56............................................... [2-5‬‬ ‫ﭘ ﺶ ﻧﻮ ﺴﻬﺎ ]ﻣﻨﻮ ‪58.................................................. [3-5‬‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪوق ارﺳﺎل ]ﻣﻨﻮ ‪58................................................. [4-5‬‬ ‫ﺷﻨ ﺪن ﭘ ﺎم ﺻﻮﺗ ]ﻣﻨﻮ ‪59...........................................[5-5‬‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎت اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻰ]ﻣﻨﻮ ‪59 ..................................
PAGE 109
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ |‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻣ و اﺑﺰار ‪72 .........................................‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﮔﺰ ﺪه ]ﻣﻨﻮ ‪72.......................................................... [1-9‬‬ ‫زﻧﮓ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ]ﻣﻨﻮ ‪72.................................................... [2-9‬‬ ‫‪] Bluetooth‬ﻣﻨﻮ ‪72...................................................... [3-9‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮدم ]ﻣﻨﻮ ‪75.............................................................. [4-9‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎﺷ ﻦ ﺣﺴﺎب ]ﻣﻨﻮ ‪75................................................
PAGE 110
‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﺸﻜﺮ از ﺧﺮ ﺪ ﮔﻮﺷ ﻣﻮﺑﺎ ﻞ ﭘ ﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ و ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﻣﺪل‬ ‫ا ل‪.‬ﺟ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ آﺧﺮ ﻦ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮژ= ﭘ ﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ د ﺠ ﺘﺎل ﻃﺮاﺣ‬ ‫ﺷﺪه ‪ KG320‬اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ا ﻦ دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ راﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺣﺎو= اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻣﻬﻤ در ﻣﻮرد ﻧﺤﻮه‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﮔﻮﺷ ﻣ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮا= اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺑﻬ ﻨﻪ و‬ ‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔ ﺮ= از اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻧﺎدرﺳﺖ ﺎ وارد آﻣﺪن ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺗﻤﺎﻣ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت را ﺑﺎ دﻗﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻐ ﺮ ﺎ اﺻﻼﺣ ﻛﻪ در ا ﻦ دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ راﻫﻨﻤﺎ ذﻛﺮ ﻧﺸﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻟﻐﻮ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻣ ﺷﻮد‪.
PAGE 111
‫ﻧﻜﺎت ا ﻤﻨ |‬ ‫ﻧﻜﺎت ا ﻤﻨ ‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫اﺧﻄﺎر‬ ‫• در ﻫﻮاﭘ ﻤﺎ ﻫﻤ ﺸﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﻮﺑﺎ ﻞ را ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻛﺮد‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎم راﻧﻨﺪﮔ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ را در دﺳﺖ ﻧﮕ ﺮ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• در ﻧﺰد ﻜ ا ﺴﺘﮕﺎه ﻫﺎ= ﺑﻨﺰ ﻦ‪ ،‬اﻧﺒﺎر ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﺳ ﺴﺎت‬ ‫ﺷ ﻤ ﺎ ﺎ ﻣﻜﺎن ﻫﺎ ﻛﻪ اﺣﺘﻤﺎل اﻧﻔﺠﺎر ﻣ رود‪ ،‬از ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﻮد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻧﻜﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮر ا ﻤﻨ ﺧﻮد‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻂ از ﺑﺎﻃﺮ= ﻫﺎ و ﺷﺎرژرﻫﺎ= اﺻﻞ‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• وﻗﺘ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ در ﺣﺎل ﺷﺎرژ ﺷﺪن اﺳﺖ آن را ﺑﺎ دﺳﺖ ﻣﺮﻃﻮب‬ ‫ﻧﮕ ﺮ ﺪ‪ .‬ز ﺮا ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ا ﺠﺎد ﺷﻮك اﻟﻜﺘﺮ ﻜ‬ ‫ﺷﺪه و ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ آﺳ ﺐ ﺟﺪ= ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪.
PAGE 112
‫ﻗﺮارﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ در ﻣﻌﺮض اﻧﺮژ‪ 5‬ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ راد ﻮ‬ ‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗ در ﻣﻮرد ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ در ﻣﻌﺮض اﻣﻮاج راد ﻮ و‬ ‫ﻣ‪$‬ﺰان ﺟﺬب و ﮋه )‪(SAR‬‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷ ﻣﻮﺑﺎ ﻞ ﻣﺪل ‪ KG320‬ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ا= ﻃﺮاﺣ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺮا ﻂ ﻛﺎرﺑﺮد= ا ﻤﻨ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ در ﻣﻌﺮض‬ ‫اﻣﻮاج راد ﻮ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ دارد‪ .‬ا ﻦ ﺷﺮا ﻂ ﺑﺮ ﭘﺎ ﻪ ﻗﻮاﻧ ﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻤ اﺳﺘﻮار اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﻮاﻧ ﻦ ا ﻤﻨ ﻃﺮاﺣ ﺷﺪه‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ا ﻤﻨ اﻓﺮاد ﺑﺪون در ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺳﻦ و ﻣ ﺰان ﺳﻼﻣﺘ‬ ‫آﻧﻬﺎ ﻃﺮاﺣ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺟﻬﺖ ا ﻤﻨ و اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺑﻬ‪$‬ﻨﻪ‬ ‫ا ﻦ دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ را ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺪ‪ .
PAGE 113
‫دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺟﻬﺖ ا ﻤﻨ و اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺑﻬ‪$‬ﻨﻪ‬ ‫دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺟﻬﺖ ا ﻤﻨ و اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺑﻬ‪$‬ﻨﻪ |‬ ‫ﻣﺮاﻗﺒﺖ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪار‪5‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﻫﺸﺪار! ﺗﻨﻬﺎ از ﺑﺎﻃﺮ=‪ ،‬ﺷﺎرژر و ﻟﻮازم ﺟﺎﻧﺒ ﺗﺄ ﺪ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺮا=‬ ‫ﻛﺎر ﺑﺎ ا ﻦ ﻣﺪل ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮاه اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪ .‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻫﺮﻧﻮع‬ ‫د ﮕﺮ ﻟﻮازم ﺟﺎﻧﺒ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻟﻐﻮ ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺄ ﺪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ا ﻦ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﮔﺮد ﺪه و ﻫﻤﭽﻨ ﻦ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎك ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺎت ﻣﺘﻔﺮﻗﻪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﺷ و از‬ ‫ﺑ ﻦ رﻓﺘﻦ ﮔﺎراﻧﺘ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣ ﮔﺮدد‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻄﻌﺎت دﺳﺘﮕﺎه را ﺑﺎز ﻧﻜﻨ ﺪ‪ .
PAGE 114
‫ﺗﻤﺎﻣ ﮔﻮﺷ ﻬﺎ= ﻣﻮﺑﺎ ﻞ دﭼﺎر اﺧﺘﻼﻻﺗ ﻣ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ‬ ‫ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ در ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد آﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺎﺛ ﺮ ﺑﮕﺬارد‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺮﮔﺰ از ﮔﻮﺷ ﺧﻮد ﺑﺪون ﻫﻤﺎﻫﻨﮕ ﻧﺰد ﻚ ﺗﺠﻬ ﺰات‬ ‫ﭘﺰﺷﻜ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻧﻜﻨ ﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﮔﻮﺷ را ﻧﺰد ﻚ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه‬ ‫ﺿﺮﺑﺎن ﻗﻠﺐ )‪ (pace maker‬در ﺟ ﺐ ﭘ ﺮاﻫﻦ ﺧﻮد ﻗﺮار ﻧﺪﻫ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﺎ= ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﺧ از ﺳﻤﻌﻚ ﻫﺎ ﺗﺪاﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﭘ ﺪا ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻮاﻧ ﻦ و ﻣﻘﺮرات اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﮔﻮﺷ ﻣﻮﺑﺎ ﻞ را در ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪا=‬ ‫ﻛﻪ در آن راﻧﻨﺪﮔ ﻣ ﻛﻨ ﺪ رﻋﺎ ﺖ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺮﮔﺰ از ﺗﻠﻔﻦ دﺳﺘ در ﺣ ﻦ راﻧﻨﺪﮔ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻧﻜﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻤﺎم دﻗﺖ ﺧﻮد را در ﻃﻮل راﻧﻨﺪﮔ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﺑﮕ ﺮ ﺪ‪.
PAGE 115
‫دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺟﻬﺖ ا ﻤﻨ و اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺑﻬ‪$‬ﻨﻪ |‬ ‫دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺟﻬﺖ ا ﻤﻨ و اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺑﻬ‪$‬ﻨﻪ‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫• اﮔﺮ اﺗﻮﻣﺒ ﻞ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻛ ﺴﻪ ﻫﻮا اﺳﺖ اﺷ ﺎ از‬ ‫ﻗﺒ ﻞ ﻟﻮازم ﺑ ﺳ ﻢ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﻤﻞ را در ﻧﺰد ﻜ آن ﻗﺮار‬ ‫ﻧﺪﻫ ﺪ‪ .‬در ﻏ ﺮ ا ﻨﺼﻮرت ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺟﺮاﺣﺎت ﺟﺪ=‬ ‫ ﺎ ﺣﺘ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮگ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮر ا ﻨ‪d‬ﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤ ﻂ اﻃﺮاف ﺧﻮد آﮔﺎه ﺑﺎﺷ ﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣ ‪B‬ﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺳ ﻘ ﮔﻮش ﻣ دﻫ ﺪ‪ ،‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎ اﻃﻤ ﻨﺎن‬ ‫ﭘ ﺪا ‪B‬ﻨ ﺪ ‪B‬ﻪ درﺟﻪ ﺻﺪا در ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺻﺎ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣ ‪B‬ﻪ ﻣ ﺧﻮاﻫ ﺪ از ﺧ ﺎﺑﺎن ﻋﺒﻮر ‪B‬ﻨ ﺪ‪.
PAGE 116
‫ﻛﻮدﻛﺎن‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷ را دور از دﺳﺘﺮس ﻛﻮدﻛﺎن ﻧﮕﻪ دار ﺪ‪ .‬ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﻛﻮﭼﻚ‬ ‫ﺟﺪا ﺷﻮﻧﺪه ﮔﻮﺷ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺧﻔﮕ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎسﻫﺎ‪ 5‬ﺿﺮور‪5‬‬ ‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﻗﺮار= ﺗﻤﺎسﻫﺎ= ﺿﺮور= ﺗﺤﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﻣ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ‬ ‫ﻫﺎ= ﺳﻠﻮﻟ ﻣ ﺴﺮ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮا ﻦ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﻧﻤ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﺑﺮا=‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻗﺮار= ﺗﻤﺎسﻫﺎ= ﺿﺮور= ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﺷ ﻣﻮﺑﺎ ﻞ ﺧﻮد اﺗﻜﺎ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎ ﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ اراﺋﻪ دﻫﻨﺪه ﺧﺪﻣﺎت ﺗﻠﻔﻨ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺧﻮد ﻣﺸﻮرت‬ ‫ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺟﻬﺖ ا ﻤﻨ و اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺑﻬ‪$‬ﻨﻪ‬ ‫وﺳﺎ ﻞ ﺑ ﺳ ﻢ در ﻫﻮاﭘ ﻤﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ اﺧﺘﻼل ﻣ ﮔﺮدﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮد را ﻗﺒﻞ از ﺳﻮار ﺷﺪن ﺑﻪ ﻫﻮاﭘ ﻤﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.
PAGE 117
‫دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺟﻬﺖ ا ﻤﻨ و اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺑﻬ‪$‬ﻨﻪ |‬ ‫دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺟﻬﺖ ا ﻤﻨ و اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺑﻬ‪$‬ﻨﻪ‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫• ﺷﺎرژر ﺑﺎﻃﺮ= را در ﻣﻌﺮض ﻣﺴﺘﻘ ﻢ ﻧﻮر ﺧﻮرﺷ ﺪ و ﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺤ ﻂ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ رﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺣﻤﺎم ﻗﺮار ﻧﺪﻫ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺎﻃﺮ= را در ﻣﺤﻞﻫﺎ= ﺳﺮد و ﺎ ﮔﺮم ﻗﺮار ﻧﺪﻫ ﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫اﺳﺖ رو= ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﺑﺎﻃﺮ= ﺗﺎﺛ ﺮ= ﻣﻨﻔ ﺑﮕﺬارد‪.
PAGE 118
‫و ﮋﮔ‪$‬ﻬﺎى ‪KG320‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﻛﻠ‪$‬ﺪﻫﺎى ﺣﺮوف و اﻋﺪاد‬ ‫• در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ آﻣﺎده ﺑ‪d‬ﺎر‪ :‬ﺷﻤﺎره ﻫﺎ را ﺑﺮا= ﺷﻤﺎره ﮔ ﺮ= وارد ‪B‬ﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠ;ﺮد ﻓﺸﺎر ﻃﻮﻻﻧ ‪q‬ﻠ‪$‬ﺪ ﻫﺎ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ − 0‬ﺗﻤﺎس ﻫﺎ= ﺑ ﻦ اﻟﻤﻠﻠ‬ ‫‪ − 1‬ﻓﻌﺎل ﺳﺎز= ﻣﻨﻮ= ﻣﺮﻛﺰ= ﭘﺴﺖ ﺻﻮﺗ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺑﻪ ‪ − 9‬ﺷﻤﺎره ﮔ ﺮ= ﺳﺮ ﻊ‬ ‫* ‪ −‬ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺴﺎز= ﺗﺎ ﻤﺮ در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﻜﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ − #‬در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ دورﺑ ﻦ ﻧﻮر ﻓﻼش را ﻓﻌﺎل ﻣ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎم وارد ﻛﺮدن ﺷﻤﺎره‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر دادن ا ﻦ ﻛﻠ ﺪ ﺑﺮا= ﻣﺪت ﻃﻮﻻﻧ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد را‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ و ﺮا ﺶ‪ :‬اﻋﺪاد و ﻛﺎراﻛﺘﺮﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 119
‫و ﮋﮔ‪$‬ﻬﺎى ‪| KG320‬‬ ‫و ﮋﮔ‪$‬ﻬﺎى ‪KG320‬‬ ‫‪ .5‬راﺑﻂ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‪/‬راﺑﻂ ﺷﺎرژ ﺑﺎﺗﺮ‪5‬‬ ‫! ﻧﺼﺐ‬ ‫ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﻗﺒﻞ از اﺗﺼﺎل ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮ ﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ روﺷﻦ و‬ ‫در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻏ ﺮﻓﻌﺎل اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .6‬ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ‪ 5‬ﺧﺎرﺟ ‬ ‫ﮔﻮش دادن ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻮز ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪون ﻫﺪﺳﺖ‬ ‫‪ .7‬دورﺑ‪$‬ﻦ و ﻛﻠ‪$‬ﺪ ﻓﻮر‪ 5‬ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﻣﺪ ﺎ‬ ‫دورﺑ ﻦ )ﻓﺸﺎر ﻃﻮﻻﻧ ( و ﻣﻨﻮ= ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﻣﺪ ﺎ )ﻓﺸﺎر ﻛﻮﺗﺎه‬ ‫ﻣﺪت( را ﻣﺴﺘﻘ ﻤﺎً ﻓﻌﺎل ﻣ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 120
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻛﻠ‪$‬ﺪﻫﺎى ﭘ‪$‬ﻤﺎ ﺸ ‬ ‫• در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ آﻣﺎده ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر‪:‬‬ ‫‪ U‬ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮاً‪ :‬ﻟ ﺴﺖ ﻣﻮارد ﻋﻼﻗﻪ‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮاً‪ :‬ﻟ ﺴﺖ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒ ﻦ‬ ‫‪ R‬ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮاً‪:‬ﻟ ﺴﺖ ﭘ ﺎم ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪ L‬ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮاً‪ :‬ﻟ ﺴﺖ ﻧﻤﺎ ﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮاً‪ :‬ﻟ ﺴﺖ ﻧﻤﺎ ﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫• در ﻣﻨﻮ‪ :‬ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ و ﭘﺎ ﻦ‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻛﻠ‪$‬ﺪ ﺗﺎ ‪$‬ﺪ‬ ‫در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ اﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ را ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮا ً ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮي ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ را ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 121
‫و ﮋﮔ‪$‬ﻬﺎى ‪KG320‬‬ ‫و ﮋﮔ‪$‬ﻬﺎى ‪| KG320‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎى ﭘﺸﺖ‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺑﺎﻃﺮ‪5‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻓﻼش دورﺑ‪$‬ﻦ‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﻟﻨﺰﻫﺎى دورﺑ‪$‬ﻦ‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﻛﻠ‪$‬ﺪ ﺟﺎﻧﺒ دورﺑ‪$‬ﻦ‬ ‫‪ .5‬ﺳﻮﻛﺖ ﺳ‪$‬ﻢ ﻛﺎرت‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 122
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ و ﺗﺼﻮ ﺮ ﮔﺮاﻓ ﻜ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒ ﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ= ﻛﻠ ﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺗﻮﺿ‪$‬ﺤﺎت‬ ‫اوﻟ ﻦ ﺧﻂ ﻧﻤﺎدﻫﺎ= ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺶ داده ﻣ ﺷﻮد ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 18‬ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘ ﺎﻣﻬﺎ‪ ،‬دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎ و ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﻮط ﻛﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ وارد ﻣ ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪ ،‬از ﻗﺒ ﻞ ﺷﻤﺎره ﻫﺎ ‬ ‫ﻣ ﺎﻧ‬ ‫ﻛﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺷﻤﺎره ﮔ ﺮ= در ﻧﻈﺮ دار ﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎ ﺶ‬ ‫داده ﻣ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫آﺧﺮ ﻦ ﺧﻂ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﻫﺎ ﻛﻪ در ﺣﺎل ﺣﺎﺿﺮ ﺑﻪ دو ﻛﻠ ﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫اﺧﺘﺼﺎص داده ﺷﺪه‪ ،‬ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﻣ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎدﻫﺎى ﺗﺼﻮ ﺮى روى ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺗﻮﺿ‪$‬ﺤﺎت‬ ‫ﺷﺪت ﺳ ﮕﻨﺎل ﺷﺒﻜﻪ را ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻰ دﻫﺪ‪.
PAGE 123
‫و ﮋﮔ‪$‬ﻬﺎى ‪KG320‬‬ ‫و ﮋﮔ‪$‬ﻬﺎى ‪| KG320‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺗﻮﺿ‪$‬ﺤﺎت‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻰ دﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻰ در ﺟﺮ ﺎن اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣ دﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻛﻠ ﻓﻌﺎل اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣ دﻫ ﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ از ﺧﺪﻣﺎت‬ ‫‪ GPRS‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻧﻤﺎ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣ دﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻓﻌﺎل اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻰ دﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ در ﺣﺎل ﻓﺮاﻣﻜﺎﻧﻰ در‬ ‫ﺷﺒﻜﻪ د ﮕﺮى ﻫﺴﺘ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻰ دﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻫﺸﺪار ﺗﻨﻈ ﻢ ﺷﺪه و‬ ‫روﺷﻦ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫وﺿﻌ ﺖ ﺷﺎرژ ﺑﺎﺗﺮى را ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻰ دﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫در ﺎﻓﺖ ﭘ ﺎم ﻣﺘﻨﻰ را ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻰ دﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻚ ﭘ ﺎم ﺻﻮﺗ در ﺎﻓﺖ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﻠﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ زﻣﺎﻧ ﺧﻮد را ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﻛ ﺪ‪.
PAGE 124
‫ﻗﺒﻞ از ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻦ ﺑﺎﺗﺮى اﻃﻤ ﻨﺎن ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻛﻨ ﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮش اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬درﭘﻮش ﺑﺎﺗﺮ‪ 5‬را ﺑﺮدار ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫درﭘﻮش ﺑﺎﺗﺮ= را ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ اﻧﺘﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ داده و ﻓﺸﺎر‬ ‫دﻫ ﺪ‪ ،‬و در ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺑﺎﺗﺮ= را ﺟﺪا ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮ‪ 5‬را ﺑ‪$‬ﺮون ﺑ‪$‬ﺎور ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺒﻪ ﭘﺎ ﻨﻰ ﺑﺎﺗﺮى را ﻧﮕﻬﺪار ﺪ و آن را از ﺟﺎى ﺑﺎﺗﺮى ﺑ ﺮون‬ ‫ﺑ ﺎور ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺳ ﻢ ﻛﺎرت‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺳ‪$‬ﻢ ﻛﺎرت و ﺑﺎﺗﺮ‪ 5‬ﮔﻮﺷ ‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺳ‪$‬ﻢ ﻛﺎرت را ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﻨ‪$‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳ ﻢ ﻛﺎرت را در ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﺨﺼﻮص آن ﺟﺎى دﻫ ﺪ‪ .‬ﺳ ﻢ‬ ‫ﻛﺎرت را ﺑﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﺨﺼﻮص آن ﺣﺮﻛﺖ دﻫ ﺪ‪ .
PAGE 125
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ |‬ ‫! ﻧﺼﺐ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺟﺎﮔﺬار=‪/‬ﺧﺎرج ﻛﺮدن ﺳ ﻢ ﻛﺎرت‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ را ﺧﺎﻣﻮش‬ ‫ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬در ﻏ ﺮ ا ﻦ ﺻﻮرت‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺎ داده ﻫﺎ= ﺳ ﻢ‬ ‫ﻛﺎرت آﺳ ﺐ ﺑﺒ ﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮ‪ 5‬را ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﻨ‪$‬ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺑﺘﺪا ﻗﺴﻤﺖ اﻧﺘﻬﺎ= ﺑﺎﺗﺮ= را‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻟﺒﻪ اﻧﺘﻬﺎ ﺟﺎ= ﺑﺎﺗﺮ= ﻓﺮو‬ ‫ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪ .‬ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻى ﺑﺎﺗﺮى را ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﭘﺎ ﻦ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫ ﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻛﺎﻣﻼ در‬ ‫ﺟﺎى ﺧﻮد ﻗﺮار ﮔ ﺮد‪.‬‬ ‫! اﺣﺘ‪$‬ﺎط‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻧﺼﺐ ﺎ ﺧﺎرج ﻛﺮدن ﺑﺎﺗﺮ=‪ ،‬ﻣﺮاﻗﺐ ﻟﺒﻪ ﺗ ﺰ در ﭘﻮش ﺑﺎﺗﺮ=‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷ ﺪ‪.
PAGE 126
‫! اﺧﻄﺎر‬ ‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎم رﻋﺪ و ﺑﺮق ﺳ ﻢ ﺑﺮق و ﺷﺎرژر را ﺟﺪا ﻛﻨ ﺪ ﺗﺎ از‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺮ ﺑﺮق ﮔﺮﻓﺘﮕ و آﺗﺶ ﺳﻮز= ﺟﻠﻮﮔ ﺮ= ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫! اﺣﺘ‪$‬ﺎط‬ ‫• راﺑﻂ را ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻧﻜﻨ ﺪ ز ﺮا ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ‬ ‫ﺧﺮاﺑﻰ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ و‪ /‬ﺎ آداﭘﺘﻮر ﺑﺮق ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫• اﮔﺮ از ﺷﺎرژر ﺑﺎﺗﺮ= در ﺧﺎرج از ﻛﺸﻮر ﺧﻮد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬ ‫ﻣ ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪ ،‬از اﺗﺼﺎل ﺗﺒﺪ ﻞ دوﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺑﺮا= ﺗﺮﻛ ﺐ ﺑﻨﺪ=‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺷﺎرژ ﻛﺮدن‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮى ﺎ ﺳ ﻢ ﻛﺎرت را ﺑ ﺮون ﻧ ﺎور ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫|‬ ‫‪ .3‬اﻧﺘﻬﺎ= د ﮕﺮ آداﺑﺘﻮر ﺑﺮق را ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮ ﺰ ﺑﺮق ﺑﺰﻧ ﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﻂ از ﺷﺎرژر‬ ‫داﺧﻞ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪ= اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.
PAGE 127
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﻫﺎ‪ 5‬ﻋﻤﻮﻣ ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﻫﺎ‪ 5‬ﻋﻤﻮﻣ |‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻗﺮار‪ 5‬ﺗﻤﺎس‬ ‫‪22‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮ ﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ روﺷﻦ اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺑﺎ وارد ﻛﺮدن ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺷﻤﺎره ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ را وارد ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺑﺮا= ﺗﻤﺎس ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠ ﺪ ‪ S‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬وﻗﺘ ﻣ ﺧﻮاﻫ ﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎس ﭘﺎ ﺎن دﻫ ﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠ ﺪ ‪ E‬را‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫ ﺪ‪..‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎس ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻛﻠ‪$‬ﺪ ارﺳﺎل‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر دادن ﻛﻠ ﺪ ‪ S‬آﺧﺮ ﻦ ﺗﻤﺎس ﻫﺎ= ورود=‪ ،‬ﺧﺮوﺟ‬ ‫و ﺷﻤﺎره ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺗﻤﺎس ﻫﺎ= ﺑ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺶ داده ﻣ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻛﻠ ﺪ ﭘ ﻤﺎ ﺸ ﺷﻤﺎره ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮد را‬ ‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.
PAGE 128
‫ﭘﺎﺳﺦ دادن ﺑﻪ ﻚ ﺗﻤﺎس‬ ‫زﻣﺎن در ﺎﻓﺖ ﻚ ﺗﻤﺎس‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ زﻧﮓ ﻣ ﺰﻧﺪ و ﻧﻤﺎد ﺗﻠﻔﻦ رو=‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺶ ﭼﺸﻤﻚ ﻣ زﻧﺪ‪ .‬در ﺻﻮرﺗ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻤﺎس‬ ‫ﮔ ﺮﻧﺪه از ﻗﺒﻞ در دﻓﺘﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ذﺧ ﺮه ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎره‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ و= رو= ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣ ﮕﺮدد‪ .‬ا ﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ از‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠ ﺖ ﻛﺎﻟﺮ آ= د= ﺗﺼﻮ ﺮ= ﭘﺸﺘ ﺒﺎﻧ ﻣ ﻜﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫! اﺣﺘ‪$‬ﺎط‬ ‫درﺣﺎﻟ ﻜﻪ از دﻓﺘﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺎ ﺳﺎ ﺮ و ﮋﮔ ﻫﺎ= ﻣﻨﻮ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬ ‫ﻣ ﻜﻨ ﺪ ﻣ ﺘﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎس در ﺎﻓﺘ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ دﻫ ﺪ‪.
PAGE 129
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﻫﺎ‪ 5‬ﻋﻤﻮﻣ |‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﻫﺎ‪ 5‬ﻋﻤﻮﻣ ‬ ‫ﻃﻮل ﻣﻮج‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪T9‬‬ ‫اﮔﺮ داﺧﻞ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎن ﻫﺴﺘ ﺪ‪ ،‬در ﺻﻮرﺗ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺰد ﻚ ﭘﻨﺠﺮه ﻗﺮار‬ ‫ﺑﮕ ﺮ ﺪ در ﺎﻓﺖ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ= ﺧﻮاﻫ ﺪ داﺷﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺳ ﮕﻨﺎل‬ ‫) ( در ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺶ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﺷﺪت ﺳ ﮕﻨﺎل آن‬ ‫را ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ا ﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻣ ﻜﻨﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎ ﻚ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﻛﻠ ﺪ ﺑﺮا=‬ ‫ﻫﺮ ﺣﺮف‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر ﺣﺮوف وارد ﺷﺪه را ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ را وارد‬ ‫ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪ T9 .‬ﻚ ﻟﻐﺘﻨﺎﻣﻪ داﺧﻞ ﮔﻮﺷ ﻣﻘﺎ ﺴﻪ ﻣ ﻜﻨﺪ و ﻟﻐﺖ‬ ‫ﺻﺤ ﺢ را ﺗﺎ ﭗ ﻣ ﻜﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﺪاد ﺣﺮوف ﻛﻤﺘﺮ= را ‪ ABC‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮا ﻦ‬ ‫در ﻣﻘﺎ ﺴﻪ ﺑﺎ روش ﻗﺪ ﻤ ﻻزم اﺳﺖ ﺗﺎ ﭗ ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.
PAGE 130
‫ﺗﻐ‪$$‬ﺮ دادن ﺣﺎﻟﺖ وارد ﻛﺮدن ﻣﺘﻦ‬ ‫‪ .1‬زﻣﺎﻧ ﻜﻪ در ﻣﺤ ﻂ وارد ﻛﺮدن ﺣﺮوف و ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻬﺎ ﻗﺮار دار ﺪ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻛﻪ در ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﭘﺎﺋ ﻦ ﺳﻤﺖ راﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ LCD‬ﮔﻮﺷ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ را ﺟﻠﺐ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﻛﺮد‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬اﮔﺮ ﻣ ﺧﻮاﻫ ﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎ را ﺗﻐ ﺮ دﻫ ﺪ‪،‬ﻛﻠ ﺪ ‪#‬‬ ‫را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫ ﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎ= ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﺗﻐ ﺮ ﻣ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 131
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﻫﺎ‪ 5‬ﻋﻤﻮﻣ |‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﻫﺎ‪ 5‬ﻋﻤﻮﻣ ‬ ‫‪26‬‬ ‫• اﮔﺮ ﺣﺘ ﭘﺲ از ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺷﺪن ﻟﻐﺖ ﻏﻠﻂ ﺑﻮد‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر‬ ‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﭘﺎﺋ ﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎ= د ﮕﺮ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻟﻐﺖ‬ ‫رﺟﻮع ﻧﻤﺎﺋ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎل‪ :‬ﺑﺮا= ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ‪ Good‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ=‬ ‫‪ 3664‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮا= ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ‪3664 ،Home‬‬ ‫]ﻛﻠ ﺪ ﭘ ﻤﺎ ﺶ ﭘﺎ ﻦ[ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• اﮔﺮ ﻟﻐﺖ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ در ﻟ ﺴﺖ اﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑ وﺟﻮد‬ ‫ﻧﺪارد آن را ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ ABC‬اﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻗﺒﻞ از اﺻﻼح ﺎ ﺣﺬف ﺣﺮوف‪ ،‬اﺑﺘﺪا ﻛﻠﻤﻪ را ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫وارد ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 132
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻤﺎد‪5‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻤﺎد= اﻣﻜﺎن وارد ﻛﺮدن ﻧﻤﺎدﻫﺎ= ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺎ ‪B‬ﺎرا‪B‬ﺘﺮ=‬ ‫ﺧﺎص را ﺑﺮا= ﺷﻤﺎ ﻓﺮاﻫﻢ ﻣ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮا= وارد ﻛﺮدن ﻚ ﻧﻤﺎد‪ ،‬ﻛﻠ ﺪ *را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫ ﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮا=‬ ‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻧﻤﺎد ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ‪ ،‬از ﻛﻠ ﺪﻫﺎ= ﭘ ﻤﺎ ﺸ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨ ﺪ‬ ‫و ﻛﻠ ﺪ ]ﺗﺄ ﺪ[ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﻫﺎ‪ 5‬ﻋﻤﻮﻣ ‬ ‫د‪B‬ﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺶ‬ ‫ﺷ ﻔﺖ‬ ‫‪1:@'!?-،.
PAGE 133
‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﻫﺎ و ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ |‬ ‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﻫﺎ و ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪28‬‬ ‫ا ﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ اى از ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﻫﺎ را در اﺧﺘ ﺎر ﺷﻤﺎ ﻗﺮار‬ ‫ﻣﻰ دﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺘﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮد را ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﻰ ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪ .‬ا ﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﻫﺎ در ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ و ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎى ﻓﺮﻋﻰ ﺗﻌﺒ ﻪ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ و‬ ‫از ﻃﺮ ﻖ دو ﻛﻠ ﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻫﺎى )<( و )>(‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺑﻞ دﺳﺘﺮﺳﻰ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ و ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎى ﻓﺮﻋﻰ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ا ﻦ اﻣﻜﺎن را ﻣﻰ دﻫﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻨﻈ ﻤﺎت ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﻫﺎى ﺧﺎص را‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﻛﺮده و ﺗﻐ ﺮ دﻫ ﺪ‪.
PAGE 134
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ در ﺣ‪$‬ﻦ ﻣ;ﺎﻟﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺶ داده ﺷﺪه رو= ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺶ ﮔﻮﺷ در‬ ‫ﻃﻮل ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﺎ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ در زﻣﺎن آﻣﺎده ﺑ‪d‬ﺎر ﻣﺘﻔﺎوت اﺳﺖ و‬ ‫ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ= آﻧﺎن در ذ ﻞ ﺗﺸﺮ ﺢ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻗﺮار‪ 5‬ﺗﻤﺎس ﺛﺎﻧﻮ ﻪ )واﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ(‬ ‫ﻣ ﺘﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﺟﻬﺖ ا ﺠﺎد ﺗﻤﺎس ﺛﺎﻧﻮ ﻪ ﺷﻤﺎره ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮد را از‬ ‫دﻓﺘﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﮔﻮﺷ ﺧﻮد ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻧﻤﺎﺋ ﺪ‪ .‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ راﺳﺖ‬ ‫را ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻧﻤﺎ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﺎﺳﺨﮕﻮ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎس در ﺎﻓﺘ ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﭘﺎﺳﺨﮕﻮ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ وﻗﺘ ﮔﻮﺷ در ﺣﺎل زﻧﮓ زدن‬ ‫اﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎدﮔ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ S‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫ ﺪ‪ .
PAGE 135
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ در ﺣ‪$‬ﻦ ﻣ;ﺎﻟﻤﻪ‬ ‫اﮔﺮ اﻧﺘﻈﺎر ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ روﺷﻦ اﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر دادن ا ﻦ دﻛﻤﻪ‬ ‫> ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﺗﻤﺎس اول را ﻧﮕﻪ دار ﺪ و ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎس دوم‬ ‫ﭘﺎﺳﺦ دﻫ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ در ﺣ‪$‬ﻦ ﻣ;ﺎﻟﻤﻪ |‬ ‫ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﻧﺪادن ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎس در ﺎﻓﺘ ‬ ‫‪30‬‬ ‫ﻣ ﺘﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﺑﺪون ﭘﺎﺳﺦ دادن ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎس در ﺎﻓﺘ آن را رد ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪ .‬و‬ ‫ﺑﺮا= ا ﻨﻜﺎر ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎدﮔ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ E‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫در ﻃ ﻚ ﺗﻤﺎس‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر دادن ﻛﻠ ﺪ ‪ E‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﺗﻤﺎس‬ ‫ورود= را رد ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.
PAGE 136
‫ﻣ ﺘﻮاﻧ ﺪ در ﺣﺎﻟ ﻜﻪ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻣ ﻜﻨ ﺪ ‪ ٬‬ﺗﻤﺎس دوﻣ ﺑﺮﻗﺮار‬ ‫ﺳﺎز ﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎره ﺗﻤﺎس دوم را ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ و اﮔﺮ ‪S‬را ﻓﺸﺎر‬ ‫دﻫ ﺪ ‪ ٬‬زﻣﺎﻧ ﻜﻪ ﺗﻤﺎس دوم ﺑﺮﻗﺮار ﻣ ﮕﺮدد ‪ ٬‬ﺗﻤﺎس اول ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر‬ ‫ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر ﭘﺸﺖ ﺧﻂ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت اﻧﺘﻈﺎر ﻗﺮار ﻣ ﮕ ﺮد‪ .‬ﻣ ﺘﻮاﻧ ﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ وﺳ ﻠﻪ دﻛﻤﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ و ﺳﭙﺲ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺗﻌﻮ ﺾ ﺗﻤﺎس‬ ‫ﺑ ﻦ دو ﺗﻤﺎس رﻓﺖ و ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﺋ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻌﺎل ﻛﺮدن ﺗﻤﺎس ﻛﻨﻔﺮاﻧﺴ در اﻧﺘﻈﺎر‬ ‫ﺑﺮا= ﻓﻌﺎل ﻛﺮدن ﺗﻤﺎس ﻛﻨﻔﺮاﻧﺴ در اﻧﺘﻈﺎر‪ ،‬ﻛﻠ ﺪ ‪S‬‬ ‫را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫ ﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺘﻨﺎوﺑﺎً ﻛﻠ ﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ ]ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ[ را ﻓﺸﺎر‬ ‫داده و ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﻤﺎس ﻫﺎ در ﻛﻨﻔﺮاﻧﺲ‪/‬اﻧﺘﻈﺎر را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.
PAGE 137
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ در ﺣ‪$‬ﻦ ﻣ;ﺎﻟﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ در ﺣ‪$‬ﻦ ﻣ;ﺎﻟﻤﻪ |‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎس ﺧﺼﻮﺻ در ﺗﻤﺎس ﻛﻨﻔﺮاﻧﺴ ‬ ‫‪32‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮا= ﺑﺮﻗﺮار ﻛﺮدن ﺗﻤﺎس ﺧﺼﻮﺻ ﺑﺎ ﻜ از ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒ ﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎس ﻛﻨﻔﺮاﻧﺴ ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎره ﺗﻤﺎس ﮔ ﺮﻧﺪه ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ را در‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺶ ﻧﺸﺎن داده‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﻛﻠ ﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ را ﻓﺸﺎر‬ ‫دﻫ ﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮا= در اﻧﺘﻈﺎر ﻗﺮار دادن ﺳﺎ ﺮ ﺗﻤﺎس ﮔ ﺮﻧﺪﮔﺎن‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻮ=‬ ‫ﺧﺼﻮﺻ ﺗﻤﺎس ﻛﻨﻔﺮاﻧﺴ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﺎ ﺎن دادن ﺑﻪ ﻛﻨﻔﺮاﻧﺲ ﺗﻠﻔﻨ ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎس ﮔ ﺮﻧﺪه ﻛﻨﻔﺮاﻧﺲ ﺗﻠﻔﻨ ﻛﻪ اﻛﻨﻮن ﻧﻤﺎ ﺶ داده‬ ‫ﻣ ﺷﻮد ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر دادن ﻛﻠ ﺪ )‪ (E‬ﻗﻄﻊ ﺷﻮد‪.
PAGE 138
‫ﻧﻤﻮدار درﺧﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﻣﺪ ﺎ‬ ‫‪ 1‬دورﺑ ﻦ‬ ‫‪ 2‬دورﺑ ﻦ ﻓ ﻠﻤﺒﺮدار=‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪا‬ ‫‪MP3 4‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬آﻟﺒﻮم ﻋﻜﺲ‬ ‫‪ 6‬آﻟﺒﻮم ﻓ ﻠﻢ‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﭘ‪$‬ﻐﺎم ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﭘ ﺎم ﺟﺪ ﺪ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺻﻨﺪوق در ﺎﻓﺖ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﭘ ﺶ ﻧﻮ ﺴﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺻﻨﺪوق ارﺳﺎل‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺷﻨ ﺪن ﭘ ﺎم ﺻﻮﺗ‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﺧﺪﻣﺎت اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻰ‬ ‫‪ 7‬اﻟﮕﻮ‬ ‫‪ 8‬ﺗﻨﻈ ﻤﺎت‬ ‫‪ 6‬اﺑﺰارﻫﺎ‪ 5‬ﺷﺨﺼ ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻓ ﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻋﻜﺲ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺼﺎو ﺮ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻣﻮﺳ ﻘ‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺻﺪاﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﻣﺘﻦ‬ ‫‪ 7‬ﺑﺎز ﻬﺎ و ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪ 8‬ﺳﺎ ﺮ ﻣﻮارد‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻮدار درﺧﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫|‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺑﺎز ﻬﺎ و ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺑﺎز ﻬﺎ و ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
PAGE 139
‫ﻧﻤﻮدار درﺧﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﻮ |‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻮدار درﺧﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫‪34‬‬ ‫‪ 7‬ﻧﻤﺎ ﺶ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺗﺼﻮ ﺮ زﻣ ﻨﻪ‬ ‫‪ 2‬رﻧﮓ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﭘ ﺎم ﺧﻮش آﻣﺪ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺗﺎ ﻤﺮ ﻧﻮر زﻣ ﻨﻪ‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﭼﺮاغ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﻧﺎم ﺷﺒ‪d‬ﻪ‬ ‫‪ 7‬ﻣﻴﺎﻧﺒﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ اﺻﻠﻲ‬ ‫‪ 8‬رﻧﮓ ﺣﺮوف و اﻋﺪاد ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺷﻤﺎره‬ ‫ﮔﻴﺮ‬ ‫‪ 8‬ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺑﻲ ﺻﺪا‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﺮزش‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺑﻠﻨﺪ‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﻫﺪﺳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 9‬ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻣ و اﺑﺰار‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺑﺮﮔﺰ ﺪه‬ ‫‪ 2‬زﻧﮓ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫‪Bluetooth 3‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻣﻮدم‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﻣﺎﺷ ﻦ ﺣﺴﺎب‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﺗﺒﺪ ﻞ واﺣﺪ‬ ‫‪ 7‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺟﻬﺎﻧ‬ ‫‪ 8‬ﭘ ﻐﺎم ﮔ ﺮ‬ ‫‪ 9‬ﺧﺪﻣﺎت ﺳ ﻢ ﻛﺎرت‬ ‫)واﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳ ﻢ(‬ ‫* ﻣﺮورﮔﺮ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺻﻔ
PAGE 140
‫ﺑﺎز ﻬﺎ و ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺟﺎوا ﺗ‪d‬ﻨﻮﻟﻮژ= ﺗﻮﺳﻌﻪ ﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ‪Sun‬‬ ‫‪ Microsystems‬اﺳﺖ‪ .‬در ا ﻨﺠﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ روﺷ ‪B‬ﻪ اﭘﻠﺖ ﻫﺎ=‬ ‫ﺟﺎوا را ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻣﺮورﮔﺮﻫﺎ= اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ‪ Netscape‬ﺎ ‪MS‬‬ ‫‪ Internet Explorer‬داﻧﻠﻮد ﻣ ‪B‬ﺮد ﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣ ﺗﻮان ‪ MIDlet‬ﻫﺎ=‬ ‫ﺟﺎوا را ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﺎ= ‪B‬ﻪ ‪ WAP‬آﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﻌﺎل اﺳﺖ‬ ‫داﻧﻠﻮد ﻧﻤﻮد‪ .‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ اراﺋﻪ دﻫﻨﺪه ﺳﺮو ﺲ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮاﺗ ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ= ﺑﺮ اﺳﺎس ﺟﺎوا ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧﻨﺪ در ﺗﻠﻔﻦ داﻧﻠﻮد و اﺟﺮا‬ ‫ﺷﻮد‪ .
PAGE 141
‫ﺑﺎز ﻬﺎ و ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺎز ﻬﺎ و ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ |‬ ‫! ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‬ ‫‪36‬‬ ‫• ﻓﺎ ﻞ ‪ JAR‬ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻓﺸﺮده از ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺟﺎوا اﺳﺖ و‬ ‫ﻓﺎ ﻞ ‪ JAD‬ﻓﺎ ﻞ ﺗﻮﺻ ﻔ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ‪B‬ﻠ ﻪ ر ﺰ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت‬ ‫ﻣ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ از داﻧﻠﻮد ‪B‬ﺮدن‪ ،‬و از‬ ‫ﻃﺮ ﻖ ﺷﺒ‪d‬ﻪ‪B ،‬ﻠ ﻪ ﺗﻮﺻ ﻔﺎت ﻓﺎ ﻞ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد در ﻓﺎ ﻞ ‪JAD‬‬ ‫را ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﻧﻤﺎﺋ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• وﻗﺘ ﻛﺎر ﺑﺮ اﺳﺎس زﺑﺎن اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد )‪ (J2ME‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎداﻣ ﻜﻪ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺨﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ= ﺧﺎﺻ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﺮا= ﻧﻮع‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺻ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﻮد‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ= ﺟﺎوا ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﮔﻮﺷ ﻫﺎ= ﻣﻮﺟﻮد در ﺑﺎزار ﺳﺎزﮔﺎر ﻧ ﺴﺖ‪ .
PAGE 142
‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻨﻮ= ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻧﺎﻣ را ﻛﻪ ﻣ ﺧﻮاﻫ ﺪ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪ ،‬وارد ﻧﻤﺎ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫! ﻧ;ﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ وارد ‪B‬ﺮدن ﺣﺮوف اول ﻧﺎم ﺎ ﺷﻤﺎره ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ= ﺳﺮ ﻊ‬ ‫ﻣ ﺴﺮ اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺑﺮا= و ﺮا ﺶ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎ ﺶ‪ ،‬ﺣﺬف‪B ،‬ﭙ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻤﺎس و ﺎ ﺻﺪا ﮔﺬار=‪،‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠ ﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ >]ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ[ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪B‬ﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ= ز ﺮ ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• و ﺮا ﺶ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻛﻠ ﺪ ﭘ ﻤﺎ ﺶ ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﻧﺎم‪،‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎره‪ ،‬ﮔﺮوه‪ ،‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ و ﺗﺼﻮ ﺮ را و ﺮا ﺶ ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.
PAGE 143
‫دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣ ﺘﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﺑﺮا= ﻫﺮ اﺳﻢ ﺗﺎ ‪ 20‬ﺣﺮف وارد ﻧﻤﺎ ﺪ اﻣﺎ در‬ ‫ﺳ ﻢ ‪B‬ﺎرت ا ﻦ ﺑﺴﺘﮕ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺳ ﻢ ‪B‬ﺎرت دارد‪.‬‬ ‫! ﻧ;ﺘﻪ‬ ‫دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ |‬ ‫ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﻧﺎم ذﺧ ﺮه ﺷﺪه و ﺗﻌﺪاد ﺷﻤﺎره ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮع ﺳ ﻢ ﻛﺎرت‬ ‫ﺑﺴﺘﮕ دارد‪.‬‬ ‫‪38‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻨﻮ= اﻓﺰودن ﻣﻮرد ﺟﺪ ﺪ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ا= را ‪B‬ﻪ ﻣ ﺨﻮاﻫ ﺪ ذﺧ ﺮه ‪B‬ﻨ ﺪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻧﻤﺎﺋ ﺪ‬ ‫ﺳ ﻢ ‪B‬ﺎرت ﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ‪ :‬اﮔﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ را ﺗﻨﻈ ﻢ ﻣ ‪d‬ﻨ ﺪ‬ ‫ﻣ ﺒﺎ ﺴﺖ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻧﻤﺎ ﺪ ‪B‬ﺪام ﺷﻤﺎره اﺻﻠ اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪]> .a‬ﺗﺄ ﺪ[ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫ ﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻧﺎم را وارد ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫‪]> .
PAGE 144
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﺷﻤﺎره ﺧﻮد را رو= ﺳ ﻢ ‪B‬ﺎرت ذﺧ ﺮه ﻧﻤﻮده‬ ‫و ﭼ ‪B‬ﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪q‬ﺎرت و ﺰ ﺖ‬ ‫]ﻣﻨﻮ ‪[6-2‬‬ ‫ا ﻦ ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ اﻣﻜﺎن ا ﺠﺎد ﻚ ﻛﺎرت و ﺰ ﺖ ﺷﺨﺼ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺎﻧﮕﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﺎم و ﺷﻤﺎره ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺮا= ﺧﻮد ا ﺠﺎد ﻧﻤﺎ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ا ﺠﺎد ﻛﺎرت و ﺰ ﺖ ﺟﺪ ﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠ ﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‬ ‫>]و ﺮا ﺶ[ را ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ،‬اﻃﻼﻋﺎت را در ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎ=‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ وارد ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫اﻣ‪d‬ﺎن ا ﺠﺎد ارﺗﺒﺎط ﻫﺮ از ‪B‬ﻠ ﺪﻫﺎ= ‪ 2‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 9‬ﺑﺎ‬ ‫اﺳﺎﻣ دﻓﺘﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺷﻤﺎره ﮔ ﺮ= ﺳﺮ ﻊ وﺟﻮد دارد‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر دادن ا ﻦ ﻛﻠ ﺪ ﻣ ﺗﻮان ﺑﻄﻮر ﻣﺴﺘﻘ ﻢ ﺗﻤﺎس‬ ‫ﮔﺮﻓﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 145
‫دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈ‪$‬ﻤﺎت‬ ‫]ﻣﻨﻮ ‪[7-2‬‬ ‫دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ |‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈ‪$‬ﻤﺎت رﻓﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﻛﻠ ﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ >]اﻧﺘﺨﺎب[‬ ‫را ﻓﺸﺎر ﺑﺪﻫ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪40‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘ‪$‬ﺶ ﻓﺮض‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘ‪$‬ﺶ ﻓﺮض رﻓﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﻛﻠ ﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﭼﭗ >]اﻧﺘﺨﺎب[ را ﻓﺸﺎر ﺑﺪﻫ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ اﮔﺮ ﻣﺘﻐ ﺮ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﺒﺪ‪ ،‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎم اﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮدن‬‫ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺳﺆال ﻣ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻤﺎره ﻛﺠﺎ ذﺧ ﺮه‬ ‫ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫ اﮔﺮ ﺳ ﻢ ﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﺪﺧﻞ را در‬‫ﺳ ﻢ ﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ذﺧ ﺮه ﻣ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 146
‫دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫|‬ ‫• ﭘﺎك ﻛﺮدن ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒ‪$‬ﻦ‬ ‫ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﻫﻤﻪ ورود= ﺳ ﻢ ‪B‬ﺎرت و ﮔﻮﺷ را ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ‬ ‫ﺣﺬف ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮاى ا ﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﻛﺪ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻰ ﻻزم اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎك ﻛﺮدن ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒ ﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﺮده و آن را ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪ ،‬و ﺳﭙﺲ ﻛﻠ ﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ >]ﺗﺎ ﺪ[ را‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ را ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﺬف ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﻪ ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪ ،‬و‬ ‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﻛﻠ ﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ >]ﺗﺎ ﺪ[ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﻛﺪ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘ را وارد ﻛﺮده‪ ،‬ﻛﻠ ﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ >‬ ‫]ﺗﺄ ﺪ[ ﺎ ﻛﻠ ﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ راﺳﺖ <]ﺑﺎزﮔﺸﺖ[ را‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫ ﺪ‪.
PAGE 147
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ر ﺰ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ر ﺰ |‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮ ﻢ‬ ‫]ﻣﻨﻮ ‪[1-3‬‬ ‫زﻣﺎﻧ ‪d‬ﻪ وارد ا ﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣ ﺸﻮ ﺪ ﺗﻘﻮ ﻢ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣ ﺸﻮد‪ .‬در‬ ‫رأس ا ﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺨﺸﻬﺎ ﺑﺮا= ﺗﺎر ﺦ ﻗﺮار دارد‪ .‬ﻫﺮ وﻗﺖ ‪B‬ﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﺎر ﺦ را ﺗﻐ ﺮ ﻣ ﺪﻫ ﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮ ﻢ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ آن ﺗﻐ ﺮ ﭘ ﺪا ﻣ ‪d‬ﻨﺪ‬ ‫و ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪه ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻌ ﻦ روز ﺧﺎص ﻣﺸﺨﺺ‬ ‫ﻣ ﺸﻮد‪ .‬ﻣﻜﺎن ﻧﻤﺎ= ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺑﻪ ‪B‬ﺎر ﺑﺮده ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ ﺗﺎ‬ ‫روز ﻣﻌ ﻦ را ﺑ ﺎﺑﺪ‪ .‬اﮔﺮ ا ﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ را در ﻣﻨﻮ= ﺗﻘﻮ ﻢ ﺑﺒ ﻨ ﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎ= آﻧﺴﺖ ‪B‬ﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺎ ﺎدداﺷﺖ در آن روز‬ ‫وﺟﻮد دارد‪ .
PAGE 148
‫ﺣﺬف ‪q‬ﻠ ‬ ‫]ﻣﻨﻮ ‪[4-1-3‬‬ ‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﺎدداﺷﺘﻬﺎ را ﻣ ﺘﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﭘﺎ‪B Â‬ﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫رﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎر ﺦ‬ ‫]ﻣﻨﻮ ‪[5-1-3‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘ ﻤﺎً ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎر ﺦ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮو ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈ‪$‬ﻢ آﻫﻨﮓ ﻫﺸﺪار‬ ‫]ﻣﻨﻮ ‪[6-1-3‬‬ ‫آﻫﻨﮓ ﻫﺸﺪار ﺗﺎر ﺦ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪه را ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﺗﻨﻈ ﻢ ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺎدداﺷﺖ‬ ‫]ﻣﻨﻮ ‪[2-3‬‬ ‫! ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‬ ‫اﮔﺮ ﻣ ﺧﻮاﻫ ﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ورود= ﻣﺘﻦ را ﺗﻐ ﺮ دﻫ ﺪ‪# ،‬را ﻓﺸﺎر‬ ‫دﻫ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈ‪$‬ﻤﺎت ﺗﻘﻮ ﻢ‬ ‫]ﻣﻨﻮ ‪[3-3‬‬ ‫در ا ﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣ ﺘﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﻧﻮع ﺗﻘﻮ ﻢ ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده را از ﺑ ﻦ ﺗﻘﻮ ﻢ‬ ‫ﻫﺎ= ﻣ ﻼد=‪ ،‬ﻗﻤﺮ= و ﺷﻤﺴ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪B‬ﻨ ﺪ‪.
PAGE 149
‫ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﻣﺪ ﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﻣ ﻞ و ﺳﻠ ﻘﻪ ﺧﻮد ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ از ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﻫﺎ=‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﻣﺪ ﺎ از ﻗﺒ ﻞ‪ ،‬دورﺑ ﻦ‪ ،‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﻮت‪ MP3 ،‬ﺑﻬﺮه ﻣﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺷﻮ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﻣﺪ ﺎ |‬ ‫! ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‬ ‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮ= ﺿﻌ ﻒ ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﻣ ﺷﻮد‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ دورﺑ ﻦ ﺎ ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﻣﺪ ﺎ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻧﻜﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎم اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﻫﺎ= ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﻣﺪ ﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫اﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ ﻣﺼﺮف ﺑﺎﻻ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﺎﺗﺮ= ﭘﺎ ﻦ ﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫دورﺑ‪$‬ﻦ‬ ‫]ﻣﻨﻮ ‪[1-4‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻛﻠ ﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ >]ﻣﻨﻮ[ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫ ﺪ‪ ،‬ﻮ ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﺮده ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﻣﺪ ﺎ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪ .
PAGE 150
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫! ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﺼﺎو ﺮ= ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ دورﺑ ﻦ ﮔﻮﺷ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه‬ ‫اﺳﺖ را در آﻟﺒﻮم ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﻣﺪ ﺎ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫|‬ ‫•‬ ‫روﺷﻨﺎ ] [‪ :‬از ﻛﻠ ﺪﻫﺎ= ﭘ ﻤﺎ ﺶ ﭼﭗ و راﺳﺖ ﺑﺮا=‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈ ﻢ روﺷﻨﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪ 9 .‬ﺳﻄﺢ روﺷﻨﺎ در‬ ‫دﺳﺘﺮس ﻣ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.+2, +1, 0, -1, -2 :‬‬ ‫اﻧﺪازه ] [‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ا ﻦ ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ اﻧﺪازه ﺗﺼﻮ ﺮ‬ ‫را ﺑﻪ ﻜ از اﻧﺪازه ﻫﺎ= ﺑﺰرگ )‪ ،(1280x960‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫)‪ ،(640x480‬ﻛﻮﭼﻚ )‪،(72x72) ،(176x220) ،(320x240‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ اﺻﻠ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻤﺎس و ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ ﺗﻨﻈ ﻢ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺪ‪.
PAGE 151
‫ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﻣﺪ ﺎ‬ ‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠ‪$‬ﺪ ﺟﺎﻧﺒ دورﺑ‪$‬ﻦ‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺑﺮا= ﭼﻨﺪ ﺛﺎﻧ ﻪ ]‪ [Q‬را ﻓﺸﺎر داده و ﻧﮕﻬﺪار ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘ ﻤﺎً ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﻜﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ دورﺑ ﻦ وارد‬ ‫ﺷﻮ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫]ﻣﻨﻮ ‪[2-4‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﻣﺪ ﺎ |‬ ‫دورﺑ‪$‬ﻦ ﻓ‪$‬ﻠﻤﺒﺮدار‪5‬‬ ‫‪46‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻨﻮ= دورﺑ‪$‬ﻦ ﻓ‪$‬ﻠﻤﺒﺮدار‪ 5‬را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪B‬ﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• روﺷﻨﺎ ] [‪ :‬اﻣﻜﺎن ﺗﻨﻈ ﻢ ﻣ ﺰان روﺷﻨﺎ را ﺑﺮا=‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻓﺮاﻫﻢ ﻣ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 152
‫ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از و ﮋﮔ ﺎدداﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗ ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣ ﺘﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﭘ ﺎم‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺗ ‪ 10‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 15‬ﺛﺎﻧ ﻪ ا= ﺿﺒﻂ ‪B‬ﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪا‬ ‫]ﻣﻨﻮ ‪[1-3-4‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ در ﻣﻨﻮ= ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﻮت ﺎدداﺷﺖ ﻫﺎ= ﺻﻮﺗ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ‪B‬ﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺑﺎ ﺷﺮوع ﺿﺒﻂ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ زﻣﺎن ﺑﺎﻗ ﻤﺎﻧﺪه و ﭘ ﺎم در‬ ‫ﺣﺎل ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣ ﺪﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬اﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮاﻫ ﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪B‬ﺮدن را ﺗﻤﺎم ‪B‬ﻨ ﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠ ﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‬ ‫>]ذﺧ ﺮه[ را ﻓﺸﺎر ﺑﺪﻫ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘ ﺎﻣﻬﺎ= ﺻﻮﺗ را ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣ ﺪﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣ ﺘﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﭘ ﺎﻣﻬﺎ=‬ ‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪه ﺻﻮﺗ را دوﺑﺎره ﺷﻨ ﺪه و ﺎ ﭘﺎ‪B Â‬ﻨ ﺪ‪ .
PAGE 153
‫ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﻣﺪ ﺎ‬ ‫‪MP3‬‬ ‫]ﻣﻨﻮ ‪[4-4‬‬ ‫‪ KG320‬ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻚ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪ MP3‬داﺧﻠ اﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬ ‫از ﻚ ﻫﺪﺳﺖ ﺳﺎزﮔﺎر ﺎ از ﻃﺮ ﻖ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ= داﺧﻠ ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ‬ ‫از ﺷﻨ ﺪن ﻓﺎ ﻞ ﻫﺎ= ﻣﻮﺳ ﻘ ‪ MP3‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮد در ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﻟﺬت ﺑﺒﺮ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﻣﺪ ﺎ |‬ ‫! ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ دﻟ ﻞ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺑﻮدن اﺑﻌﺎد ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ‪ ،‬در ﺑﻌﻀ ﺣﺎﻻت ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫اﺳﺖ ﺻﺪا ﻧﺎﻣﻔﻬﻮم ﺷﻮد‪ ،‬ﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎً زﻣﺎﻧ ﻛﻪ ﻣ ﺰان ﺻﺪا رو=‬ ‫ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ و ﺻﺪا= ﺑﺎس ﺑﺴ ﺎر ز ﺎد اﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮا ﻦ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺻ ﻪ‬ ‫ﻣ ﻛﻨ ﻢ ﺑﺮا= ا ﻦ ﻛﻪ از ﻛ ﻔ ﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ= ﻣﻮﺳ ﻘ ﻟﺬت ﺑﺒﺮ ﺪ‪ ،‬از‬ ‫ﻫﺪﺳﺖ اﺳﺘﺮ ﻮ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.
PAGE 154
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ز ﺮ ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﻣ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺎم ﻓﺎﻳﻞ و ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ آن‬ ‫ﻞﯾﺎﻓ ﻡﺎﻧ‬ ‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﺻﺪا‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﺳﻄﺢ ﺻﺪا ‪ ،‬ﺑ ﺻﺪا‬ ‫را ﻧ ﺰ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻣ ﺷﻮد‬ ‫ﻃﺮح دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫اﺳﺘﺮ ﻮ‬ ‫ﺑﺪون ﺗﺮﺗ ﺐ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫وﺿﻌ ﺖ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺳ ﻘ‬ ‫ﺎﻫ ﻪﻨﯾﺰﮔ‬ ‫ﺐﻘﻋ‬ ‫ﻧﻮار ﭘ ﺸﺮﻓﺖ‬ ‫ﻣ ﺰان ﺗﻨﻈ ﻢ ﻫﻤﺴﺎن ﺳﺎز‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﻣﺪ ﺎ‬ ‫! ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ‪) MASS STORAGE‬ذﺧ ﺮه ﺳﺎز= اﻧﺒﻮه( ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ IDLE‬ﻛﺎر ﻣ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺪ ﻓﺎ ﻞ ﻫﺎ= ‪ MP3‬را ﻓﻘﻂ در ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻣﻮﺳ ﻘ در‬ ‫رﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻛﭙ ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.
PAGE 155
‫ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﻣﺪ ﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺮار‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻫﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺮار ﻫﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺮار ﻜﺒﺎر‬ ‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺗﻜﺮار‬ ‫‪A➝B‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﻣﺪ ﺎ |‬ ‫! ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫‪50‬‬ ‫در ﻣﻮارد= ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎ ﻞ ﻧﺎﻣﻌﺘﺒﺮ در ﻟ ﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ وﺟﻮد داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ ﻚ ﭘ ﺎم ﺧﻄﺎ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪه و ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻠ ﺑﺎز ﻣ ﮔﺮدد‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ‪ MP3‬را ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪ MP3‬را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب‬ ‫ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ‪ MP3‬را ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪ MP3‬را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب‬ ‫ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪]> .‬ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ[ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﻟ‪$‬ﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ :‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﻣﻮﺳ ﻘ د ﮕﺮ=‬ ‫از ﻓﺎ ﻞ ‪ MP3‬در ﺣﺎل ﭘﺨﺶ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.
PAGE 156
‫• ﺟﻠﻮه د ﺪار‪5‬‬ ‫ا ﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ اﻣﻜﺎن ﺗﻐ ﺮ ﭘﺲ زﻣ ﻨﻪ د ﺪار= ‪ LCD‬اﺻﻠ و‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻋ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ را در ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﭘﺨﺶ ‪ MP3‬ﺑﺮا= ﺷﻤﺎ ﻓﺮاﻫﻢ‬ ‫ﻣ ﻛﻨﺪ‪:‬ﻧﻮر‪ ،‬ﭘﺮش‪ ،‬ﮔ ﺘﺎرزن‪.‬‬ ‫! ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺳ ﻘ ﻫﺎ در ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ ﺗﻜﺜ ﺮ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﻣ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ و دارا= ﻗﺎﻧﻮن‬ ‫ﻣﻠ و ﺑ ﻦ اﻟﻤﻠﻠ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮا= ﺗﻮﻟ ﺪ ﻣﺠﺪد ﺎ ﻛﭙ ﻣﻮﺳ ﻘ ‪،‬‬ ‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ اﺟﺎزه ﺎ ﻚ ﮔﻮاﻫ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺿﺮور= ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬در‬ ‫ﺑﻌﻀ از ﻛﺸﻮرﻫﺎ ﻗﺎﻧﻮن ﻣﻠ ﻛﭙ اﺧﺘﺼﺎﺻ از ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻻت‬ ‫دارا= ﺣﻖ ﭼﺎپ ﻣﻤﻨﻮع ﻣ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﻗﺎﻧﻮن ﻣﻠ را در‬ ‫ﻛﺸﻮرﻫﺎ= ﻗﺎﺑﻞ اﺟﺮا در ﺧﺼﻮص اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﭼﻨ ﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻻﺗ‬ ‫ﺑﺮرﺳ ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.
PAGE 157
‫ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﻣﺪ ﺎ‬ ‫• ﺣﺬف ﻫﻤﻪ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻫﺎ‪ :‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻫﺎ را ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻃﻮر ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎن ﺣﺬف ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• اﻃﻼﻋﺎت‪ :‬اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗ را در ﻣﻮرد ﺗﺼﻮ ﺮ ذﺧ ﺮه ﺷﺪه ﻧﻤﺎ ﺶ‬ ‫ﻣ دﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫! ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﻣﺪ ﺎ |‬ ‫آﻟﺒﻮم ﻋﻜﺲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻫﺎ= ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎ دورﺑ ﻦ ﮔﻮﺷ را‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎ ﺶ ﻣ دﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪52‬‬ ‫آﻟﺒﻮم ﻓ‪$‬ﻠﻢ‬ ‫]ﻣﻨﻮ ‪[6-4‬‬ ‫ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﻓ ﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﻛﻪ رد ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ذﺧ ﺮه ﺷﺪه ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه‬ ‫ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﭘﺨﺶ‪ :‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻓﺸﺎر دادن ﻛﻠ ﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺪ ﺎ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ= ﭘﺨﺶ از ﻣﻨﻮ= ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎ ﻞ ﻫﺎ= و ﺪﺋﻮ را ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.
PAGE 158
‫ﭘ‪$‬ﻐﺎم ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﭘ‪$‬ﺎم ﻣﺘﻨ ‬ ‫]ﻣﻨﻮ ‪[1-1-5‬‬ ‫در ﺣﺎل ﺑﺮرﺳ ﺗﻌﺪاد ﺻﻔﺤﺎت ﭘ ﺎم ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﭘ ﺎم ﻣﺘﻨ‬ ‫ﺑﻨﻮ ﺴﺪ و و ﺮا ﺶ ‪B‬ﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر دادن ﻛﻠ ﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ >]اﻧﺘﺨﺎب[ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮ=‬ ‫ﭘ ﺎﻣﻬﺎ= ﺟﺪ ﺪ وارد ﺷﻮ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬اﮔﺮ ﻣ ﺧﻮاﻫ ﺪ ﭘ ﺎم ﺟﺪ ﺪ= ﺑﻨﻮ ﺴ ﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﭘ‪$‬ﺎم‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻨ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺖ در وارد ‪B‬ﺮدن ﻣﺘﻦ‪ ،‬از ‪ T9‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ‪B‬ﻨ ﺪ‪.
PAGE 159
‫ﭘ‪$‬ﻐﺎم ﻫﺎ |‬ ‫ﭘ‪$‬ﻐﺎم ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪54‬‬ ‫ ﺻﺪا‪ :‬ﺻﺪاﻫﺎ ‪B‬ﻪ ﺑﺮا= ﭘ ﺎم ﻫﺎ= ‪B‬ﻮﺗﺎه در دﺳﺘﺮس‬‫ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ را ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﺿﻤ ﻤﻪ ‪B‬ﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ اﻟﮕﻮﻫﺎ‪ 5‬ﻣﺘﻦ‪ :‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ از اﻟﮕﻮﻫﺎ= ﻣﺘﻨ ﺗﻨﻈ ﻢ‬‫ﺷﺪه در ﺗﻠﻔﻦ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻧﻤﺎ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺻﺪا‪ :‬ﺻﺪاﻫﺎ ‪B‬ﻪ ﺑﺮا= ﭘ ﺎم ﻫﺎ= ‪B‬ﻮﺗﺎه در دﺳﺘﺮس‬‫ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ را ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﺿﻤ ﻤﻪ ‪B‬ﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ اﺳﺎﻣ ‪ :‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﺷﻤﺎره ﻫﺎ= ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺎ آدرس ﻫﺎ=‬‫ﭘﺴﺖ اﻟ‪d‬ﺘﺮوﻧ ‪ d‬را ﺑﻪ دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ اﺿﺎﻓﻪ ‪B‬ﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻧﻤﺎد‪ :‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ‪B‬ﺎرا‪B‬ﺘﺮ= و ﮋه را اﺿﺎﻓﻪ ‪B‬ﻨ ﺪ‪.
PAGE 160
‫! ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﭘ ﺎم ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﺧﻮد‪B‬ﺎر در ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺧﺮوﺟ ذﺧ ﺮه ﻣ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺣﺘ ﭘﺲ از ارﺳﺎل ﻧﺎﻣﻮﻓﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﭘ‪$‬ﺶ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺶ‪ :‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﭘ ﺶ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺶ ﭘ ﺎم ﻫﺎ= ﻣﻮﻟﺘ‬ ‫ﻣﺪ ﺎ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ا ﺪ را ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪..‬‬ ‫• ذﺧ‪$‬ﺮه‪ :‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﭘ ﺎم ﻫﺎ= ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﻣﺪ ﺎ را در ﭘ ﺶ ﻧﻮ ﺲ‬ ‫ﻫﺎ ﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان اﻟﮕﻮ ذﺧ ﺮه ﻛﻨ ﺪ‬ ‫• و ﺮا ﺶ ﻣﻮﺿﻮع‪ :‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﭘ ﺎم ﻫﺎ= ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﻣﺪ ﺎ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب‬ ‫ﺷﺪه را ﺗﺼﺤ ﺢ ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘ‪$‬ﻐﺎم ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ ﻚ ﭘ ﺎم ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﻣﺪ ﺎ ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ دارا= ﻣﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺎو ﺮ‪ ،‬و‪ /‬ﺎ ﻛﻠ ﭗ‬ ‫ﻫﺎ= ﺻﻮﺗ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.
PAGE 161
‫ﭘ‪$‬ﻐﺎم ﻫﺎ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﭘ‪$‬ﻐﺎم ﻫﺎ |‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪56‬‬ ‫اﻓﺰودن اﺳﻼ ﺪ‪ :‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ از اﺳﻼ ﺪ ﻓﻌﻠ ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ‬ ‫اﺳﻼ ﺪ اﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ در ﺑ‪$‬ﻦ اﺳﻼ ﺪﻫﺎ‪ :‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﺑﻪ اﺳﻼ ﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺮو ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬف اﺳﻼ ﺪ‪ :‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ اﺳﻼ ﺪﻫﺎ= ﻓﻌﻠ را ﺣﺬف ‪B‬ﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈ‪$‬ﻢ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ اﺳﻼ ﺪ‬ ‫ ﺗﻨﻈ‪$‬ﻢ ﺗﺎ ﻤﺮ‪ :‬ﺗﺎ ﻤﺮ را ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﺑﺮا= اﺳﻼ ﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻦ‪،‬‬‫ﺗﺼﻮ ﺮ ﺎ ﺻﺪا ﺗﻨﻈ ﻢ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺪ‪..‬‬ ‫ ﺗﻌﻮ ﺾ ﻣﺘﻦ و ﺗﺼﻮ ﺮ‪ :‬ﺗﺼﺎو ﺮ و ﻣﺘﻮن ﭘ ﺎم را‬‫ﻣ ﺘﻮاﻧ ﺪ در اﺳﻼ ﺪ ﺗﻐ ﺮ دﻫ ﺪ‪.
PAGE 162
‫ﭘ‪$‬ﻐﺎم ﻫﺎ‬ ‫اﮔﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ "ﻓﻀﺎ ﺑﺮا= ﭘ ﻐﺎم ﺳ ﻢ ‪B‬ﺎرت ﻧ ﺴﺖ" را ﻧﺸﺎن‬ ‫دﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎ ﺪ ﭘ ﺎم ﻫﺎ= ﺳ ﻢ ‪B‬ﺎرت را از ﺻﻨﺪوق در ﺎﻓﺖ‬ ‫ﺣﺬف ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪ .‬اﮔﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ "ﻓﻀﺎ ﺑﺮا= ﭘ ﻐﺎم ﻧ ﺴﺖ" را ﻧﺸﺎن‬ ‫دﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﻓﻀﺎ= ﻫﺮ ﻣﻜﺎن ذﺧ ﺮه را ﺑﺎ ﺣﺬف ﭘ ﺎم ﻫﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫رﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ و ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ اﻓﺰا ﺶ دﻫ ﺪ‪.
PAGE 163
‫ﭘ‪$‬ﻐﺎم ﻫﺎ‬ ‫• اﻃﻼﻋﺎت‪ :‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﭘ ﺎم ﻫﺎ= در ﺎﻓﺘ ؛‬ ‫آدرس ﮔ ﺮﻧﺪه‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺿﻮع )ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮا= ﭘ ﺎم ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﻣﺪ ﺎ(‪ ،‬زﻣﺎن و‬ ‫ﺗﺎر ﺦ ﭘ ﺎم‪ ،‬ﻧﻮع و اﻧﺪازه ﭘ ﺎم را ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺬف ﻫﻤﻪ‪ :‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﭘ ﺎم ﻫﺎ را ﺣﺬف ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘ‪$‬ﻐﺎم ﻫﺎ |‬ ‫ﭘ‪$‬ﺶ ﻧﻮ ﺴﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪58‬‬ ‫]ﻣﻨﻮ ‪[3-5‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ا ﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﭘﻨﺞ ﭘ ﺎم‬ ‫ﭼﻨﺪرﺳﺎﻧﻪ ا= را ﻛﻪ ﻏﺎﻟﺒﺎً ﺑﻜﺎر ﻣ ﺑﺮ ﺪ از ﭘ ﺶ ﺗﻨﻈ ﻢ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎ ﺪ‪ .‬ا ﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻟ ﺴﺖ ﭘ ﺎﻣﻬﺎ= ﭼﻨﺪرﺳﺎﻧﻪ ا= از ﭘ ﺶ ﺗﻌ ﻦ‬ ‫ﺷﺪه را ﻧﻤﺎ ﺶ ﻣ دﻫﺪ‪.
PAGE 164
‫ﭘﺲ از اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ا ﻦ ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮا= ﮔﻮش دادن ﺑﻪ ﭘ ﺎﻣﻬﺎ= ﺻﻮﺗ‬ ‫ﻛﻠ ﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ >]ﺗﺄ ﺪ[ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫ ﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮا= ﮔﻮش دادن‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﭘ ﺎم ﻫﺎ= ﺻﻮﺗ ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨ ﻦ ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ آﻣﺎده ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻛﺎر ﻛﻠ ﺪ ‪1‬را ﻓﺸﺎر داده و ﻧﮕﻬﺪار ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫! ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫وﻗﺘ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺻﻮﺗ در ﺎﻓﺖ ﻣ ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻧﻤﺎد ﺗﺼﻮ ﺮ= را ﻧﺸﺎن‬ ‫ﻣ دﻫﺪ و ﺷﻤﺎ ﻫﺸﺪار را ﻣ ﺷﻨﻮ ﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺟﻬﺖ ﭘ ﻜﺮﺑﻨﺪ=‬ ‫ﺻﺤ ﺢ ﮔﻮﺷ ‪ ،‬ﺟﺰﺋ ﺎت ا ﻦ ﺧﺪﻣﺎت را ﺑﺎ اراﺋﻪ دﻫﻨﺪه ﺳﺮو ﺲ‬ ‫ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺧﻮد ﺑﺮرﺳ ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘ ﺎم ﻫﺎ= ﺧﺪﻣﺎت اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗ ﭘ ﺎم ﻫﺎ= ﻣﺘﻨ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ ‪ GSM‬ارﺳﺎل ﻣ ﺷﻮد‪ .
PAGE 165
‫ﭘ‪$‬ﻐﺎم ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺧﻮاﻧﺪن‬ ‫]ﻣﻨﻮ ‪[1-6-5‬‬ ‫ﭘ‪$‬ﻐﺎم ﻫﺎ |‬ ‫‪ .1‬وﻗﺘ ﭘ ﺎم ﺧﺪﻣﺎت اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗ در ﺎﻓﺖ ﻛﺮده و ﺑﺮا= ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه‬ ‫ﭘ ﺎم ﺧﻮاﻧﺪن را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﺮده ا ﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘ ﺎم در ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺶ‬ ‫داده ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﭘ ﺎم ﺑﻌﺪ= را ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ‪L,R‬‬ ‫ ﺎ >]ﺑﻌﺪ[ ﺑﺨﻮاﻧ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﭘ ﺎم ﺗﺎ وﻗﺘ ﻛﻪ ﭘ ﺎم د ﮕﺮ= در ﺎﻓﺖ ﺷﻮد‪ ،‬ﻧﺸﺎن داده‬ ‫ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪60‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺎو ﻦ‬ ‫)ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ و اﺷﺘﺮاك ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﮕ دارد(‬ ‫• اﻓﺰودن ﻣﻮرد ﺟﺪ ﺪ‪ :‬ﺷﻤﺎره ﻫﺎ= ﭘ ﺎم ﺧﺪﻣﺎت اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗ را‬ ‫ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺎم ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺎر آن در ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ اﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.
PAGE 166
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫اﻧﻮاع ﭘ‪$‬ﻐﺎم‪ :‬ﻣﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﺻﺪا‪ ،‬ﻓﺎ‪q‬ﺲ‪ ،‬اﻃﻼع رﺳﺎﻧ ﻣﻠ ‪،‬‬ ‫‪ ،X.400‬ﭘﺴﺖ اﻟ;ﺘﺮوﻧ‪ERMES ، ;$‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮع ﭘ ﺎم ﺑﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺗﻨﻈ ﻢ ﻣ ﮕﺮدد‪ .‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﻣﺘﻦ‬ ‫را ﺑﻪ اﻧﻮاع د ﮕﺮ آن ﺗﺒﺪ ﻞ ‪B‬ﻨ ﺪ‪ .‬در ﺧﺼﻮص ﻧﺤﻮه دﺳﺘ ﺎﺑ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ا ﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ اراﺋﻪ دﻫﻨﺪه ﺳﺮو ﺲ ﺧﻮد ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﮕ ﺮ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺪت اﻋﺘﺒﺎر‪ :‬ا ﻦ ﺧﺪﻣﺖ ﺷﺒ‪d‬ﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ اﻣ‪d‬ﺎن ﻣ ﺪﻫﺪ‬ ‫‪B‬ﻪ ﭘ ﺎﻣﻬﺎ= ﻣﺘﻨ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﺎ ﭼﻪ ﻣﺪت در ﻣﺮ‪B‬ﺰ ﭘ ﺎم ﺣﻔﻆ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰارش ﺗﺤﻮ ﻞ‪ :‬در ﺻﻮرت اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ﺑﻠﻪ ﻣ ﺘﻮاﻧ ﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺒ ﻨ ﺪ ﭘ ﺎﻣﺘﺎن ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮﻓﻘ ﺖ ارﺳﺎل ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪.
PAGE 167
‫ﭘ‪$‬ﻐﺎم ﻫﺎ‬ ‫• ﻣﺮ‪q‬ﺰ ‪ :SMS‬اﮔﺮ ﻣ ﺨﻮاﻫ ﺪ ‪B‬ﻪ ﭘ ﺎم ﻣﺘﻦ را ﺑﻔﺮﺳﺘ ﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧ ﻣﺮ‪B‬ﺰ ‪ SMS‬را از ا ﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣ ﺘﻮاﻧ ﺪ در ﺎﻓﺖ ‪B‬ﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘ‪$‬ﺎم ﺗﺼﻮ ﺮ‪5‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﭘ‪$‬ﻐﺎم ﻫﺎ |‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪62‬‬ ‫]ﻣﻨﻮ ‪[2-8-5‬‬ ‫اوﻟﻮ ﺖ‪ :‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ اوﻟﻮ ﺖ ﭘ ﻐﺎم اﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑ ﺧﻮد را‬ ‫ﺗﻌ ﻦ ‪B‬ﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺪت اﻋﺘﺒﺎر‪ :‬ا ﻦ ﺳﺮو ﺲ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ اﺟﺎزه ﻣ ﺪﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺪت‬ ‫زﻣﺎﻧ را ‪B‬ﻪ ﭘ ﺎﻣﻬﺎ در ﻣﺮ‪B‬ﺰ ﭘ ﺎم ﻧﮕﻬﺪار= ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌ ﻦ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺿﻮع‪ :‬وﻗﺘ ا ﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﻌﺎل اﺳﺖ ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﻣﻮﺿﻮع‬ ‫ﭘ ﺎم ﻫﺎ= ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﻣﺪ ﺎ را وارد ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.
PAGE 168
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎت اﻃﻼﻋﺎت‬ ‫• در ﺎﻓﺖ‬ ‫]ﻣﻨﻮ ‪[4-8-5‬‬ ‫• زﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮدن زﺑﺎن ﻣﻄﻠﻮب ﺧﻮد را ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪B‬ﻨ ﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﭘ ﺎم ﺧﺪﻣﺖ اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗ ﺑﻪ زﺑﺎن ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﺗﺎن ﻧﻤﺎ ﺶ‬ ‫داده ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘ‪$‬ﻐﺎم ﮔﺬاﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه‬ ‫]ﻣﻨﻮ ‪[5-8-5‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ را ﻣ ﺘﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﻃﻮر= اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪B‬ﻨ ﺪ ‪B‬ﻪ ﭘ ﻐﺎم را در ﺎﻓﺖ‬ ‫‪B‬ﻨ ﺪ و ﺎ ﺧ ﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘ‪$‬ﻐﺎم ﻫﺎ‬ ‫اﮔﺮ ﺷﺒ‪d‬ﻪ ا ﻦ ﺳ ﺴﺘﻢ را ﭘﺸﺘ ﺒﺎﻧ ﻣ ‪B‬ﻨﺪ ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺻﺪا= ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎده ﺷﺪه را در ﺎﻓﺖ ‪B‬ﻨ ﺪ‪ .‬وﻗﺘ ‪d‬ﻪ ﭘﺴﺖ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺗ ﺟﺪ ﺪ ﻣ ﺮﺳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ رو= ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ‬ ‫ﺷﺪ‪.
PAGE 169
‫اﺑﺰارﻫﺎ‪ 5‬ﺷﺨﺼ ‬ ‫! ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﺎم ﭘ ﺶ ﻓﺮض ﭘﻮﺷﻪ را ﺗﻐ ﺮ ﻧﺪﻫ ﺪ‪ ،‬ز ﺮا در ا ﻦ ﺻﻮرت درﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻛﺎر ﻧﻤ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺑﺰارﻫﺎ‪ 5‬ﺷﺨﺼ |‬ ‫ﻓ‪$‬ﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪64‬‬ ‫]ﻣﻨﻮ ‪[1-6‬‬ ‫ﻟ ﺴﺖ ﻓﺎ ﻞ ﻫﺎ= ‪) MP4 ،3G2 ،3GP‬ﺗﺎ ‪ (208×160‬در ﻣﺪ ﺎ‪/‬‬ ‫ﻓ ﻠﻤﻬﺎ= ﻣﻦ در ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﻣﺪ ﺎ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺶ داده ﻣ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫• ﭘﺨﺶ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر دادن ﻛﻠ ﺪ ﺗﺄ ﺪ ﺎ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﻨﻮ= ﭘﺨﺶ از‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ= ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﻓ ﻠﻢ را ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ارﺳﺎل از ﻃﺮ ﻖ ‪ :Bluetooth‬از ﻃﺮ ﻖ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ‬ ‫ﻓﺎ ﻞ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ را ﺑﻪ ﻚ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه د ﮕﺮ ارﺳﺎل ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.
PAGE 170
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ز‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫اﺑﺰارﻫﺎ‪ 5‬ﺷﺨﺼ ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ارﺳﺎل از ﻃﺮ ﻖ ﭘ‪$‬ﺎم ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﻣﺪ ﺎ‪ :‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﭘ ﺎم ﻣﻮﻟﺘ‬ ‫ﻣﺪ ﺎ را ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮاه ﻚ ﻋﻜﺲ ارﺳﺎل ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ارﺳﺎل از ﻃﺮ ﻖ ‪ :Bluetooth‬از ﻃﺮ ﻖ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ‬ ‫ﻓﺎ ﻞ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ را ﺑﻪ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه د ﮕﺮ ارﺳﺎل ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐ‪$$‬ﺮ ﻧﺎم‪ :‬ﻧﺎم ﻓﺎ ﻞ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪه را ﺗﻐ ﺮ دﻫ ﺪ‪.‬ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪاد ﻧﻮ ﺴﻪ ﻫﺎ ‪ 34‬ﻣ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬و ﻧﻤ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ ﻓﺎ ﻞ‬ ‫را ﺗﻐ ﺮ دﻫ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬف‪ :‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﻓﺎ ﻠ را ﺣﺬف ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬف ﻛﻠ ‪ :‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎ ﻞ ﻫﺎ= ﻣﻮﺟﻮد در ﻟ ﺴﺖ را‬ ‫ﺣﺬف ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.
PAGE 171
‫اﺑﺰارﻫﺎ‪ 5‬ﺷﺨﺼ ‬ ‫اﺑﺰارﻫﺎ‪ 5‬ﺷﺨﺼ |‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺳ‪$‬ﻘ ‬ ‫‪66‬‬ ‫]ﻣﻨﻮ ‪[4-6‬‬ ‫در ﻣﺪ ﺎ‪/‬ﻣﻮﺳ ﻘ ﻣﻦ در ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﻣﺪ ﺎ ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ‬ ‫ﻟ ﺴﺖ ﻓﺎ ﻞ ﻫﺎ= ‪ M4A ،AAC ،MP4 ،MP3‬و ‪ WMA‬را‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﭘﺨﺶ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر دادن ﻛﻠ ﺪ ﺗﺄ ﺪ ﺎ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﻨﻮ= ﭘﺨﺶ از‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ= ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﻓ ﻠﻢ را ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ارﺳﺎل از ﻃﺮ ﻖ ‪ :Bluetooth‬از ﻃﺮ ﻖ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ‬ ‫ﻓﺎ ﻞ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ را ﺑﻪ ﻚ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه د ﮕﺮ ارﺳﺎل ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻐ‪$$‬ﺮ ﻧﺎم‪ :‬ﻧﺎم ﻓﺎ ﻞ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪه را ﺗﻐ ﺮ ﻣ دﻫﺪ‪.‬ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪاد ﻧﻮ ﺴﻪ ﻫﺎ ‪ 34‬ﻣ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .
PAGE 172
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ اﻧﺪازه ﻓﺎ ﻞ ‪ TXT‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺶ‪ 460 ،‬ﻛ ﻠﻮﺑﺎ ﺖ‬ ‫اﺳﺖ‪..‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ارﺳﺎل از ﻃﺮ ﻖ ‪ :Bluetooth‬از ﻃﺮ ﻖ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ‬ ‫ﻓﺎ ﻞ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ را ﺑﻪ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه د ﮕﺮ ارﺳﺎل ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐ‪$$‬ﺮ ﻧﺎم‪ :‬ﻧﺎم ﻓﺎ ﻞ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪه را ﺗﻐ ﺮﻣ دﻫﺪ‪.‬ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪاد ﻧﻮ ﺴﻪ ﻫﺎ ‪ 34‬ﻣ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬و ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﻤ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ‬ ‫ﻓﺎ ﻞ را ﺗﻐ ﺮ دﻫ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬف‪ :‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﻓﺎ ﻠ را ﺣﺬف ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬف ﻛﻠ ‪ :‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎ ﻞ ﻫﺎ= ﻣﻮﺟﻮد در ﻟ ﺴﺖ را‬ ‫ﺣﺬف ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت‪ :‬اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻓﺎ ﻞ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺶ داده ﻣ ﺷﻮد‪.
PAGE 173
‫ﻧﻤﺎ ﺶ‬ ‫ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﻫﺎ= ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ را ﺗﻨﻈ ﻢ ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮ ﺮ زﻣ‪$‬ﻨﻪ‬ ‫]ﻣﻨﻮ ‪[1-7‬‬ ‫ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﺗﺼﻮ ﺮ ﭘﺲ زﻣ ﻨﻪ ﺑﺮا= ﺣﺎﻟﺖ آﻣﺎده ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر را‬ ‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎ ﺶ |‬ ‫ﭘ‪$‬ﺶ ﻓﺮض‬ ‫‪68‬‬ ‫]ﻣﻨﻮ ‪[1-1-7‬‬ ‫ ﺗﺼﻮ ﺮ ﺎ اﻧ ﻤ ﺸﻦ را ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان ﭘﺲ زﻣ ﻨﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر دادن‬ ‫‪ L, R, U, D‬ﻣ ﺘﻮاﻧ ﺪا ﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪B‬ﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺷﺨﺼ ‬ ‫]ﻣﻨﻮ ‪[2-1-7‬‬ ‫ ﺗﺼﻮ ﺮ ﺎ اﻧ ﻤ ﺸﻦ را ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان ﭘﺲ زﻣ ﻨﻪ ﻣ ﺘﻮاﻧ ﺪ‬ ‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪B‬ﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫رﻧﮓ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫]ﻣﻨﻮ ‪[2-7‬‬ ‫در ا ﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﻣﻀﻤﻮن رﻧﮕ ﺑﺮا= ﻣﻨﻮ در اﺧﺘ ﺎر دار ﺪ‪ .
PAGE 174
‫ﭼﺮاغ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫]ﻣﻨﻮ ‪[5-7‬‬ ‫ﻣﺪت روﺷﻨ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺶ را ﻣ ﺘﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﺗﻌ ﻦ ‪B‬ﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺎم ﺷﺒ;ﻪ‬ ‫]ﻣﻨﻮ ‪[6-7‬‬ ‫رﻧﮓ ﺣﺮوف و اﻋﺪاد ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺷﻤﺎره ﮔﻴﺮ‬ ‫]ﻣﻨﻮ ‪[8-7‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺮﻗﺮاري ﺗﻤﺎس‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر دادن ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎي ﻋﺪدي در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬ ‫آﻣﺎده ﺑﻜﺎر ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ رﻧﮓ ﺷﻤﺎره ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ داده ﺷﺪه را ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫در ﺻﻮرت اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪) on‬روﺷﻦ(‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﻫﺎي ﭼﻬﺎر‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﺸﻲ و ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ را ﺑﺼﻮرت ﺗﺼﺎوﻳﺮي در وﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﭘﻨﺠﺮه ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎل ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 175
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ |‬ ‫در ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ آﻫﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ= ﺗﻠﻔﻦ را ﺑﺮا=‬ ‫ﻣﺤ ﻂ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﮔﺮوه ﻫﺎ= ﺗﻤﺎس و رو ﺪادﻫﺎ= ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈ ﻢ و‬ ‫ﺷﺨﺼ ﺳﺎز= ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﻨﺞ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ از ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻈ ﻢ ﺷﺪه در دﺳﺘﺮس اﺳﺖ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﻲ ﺻﺪا‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﺮزش‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﻨﺪ و ﻫﺪﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺮ ﻚ از ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺎ را ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻠ ﻘﻪ ﺧﻮد ﺗﻨﻈ ﻢ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎ ﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﻠ ﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ ]ﻣﻨﻮ[ را ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ،‬و ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از‬ ‫ﻛﻠ ﺪﻫﺎ= ﭘ ﻤﺎ ﺸ ﺑﺎﻻ‪/‬ﭘﺎ ﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺎ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪70‬‬ ‫ﻓﻌﺎل ‪q‬ﻨ‪$‬ﺪ‬ ‫]ﻣﻨﻮ ‪[1-x-8‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻟ ﺴﺖ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺶ داده ﻣ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 176
‫‪ .1‬ﺑﺮا= ﺗﻐ ﺮ ﻧﺎم ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ در ﻟ ﺴﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ رﻓﺘﻪ و ﭘﺲ از ﻓﺸﺎر دادن ﻛﻠ ﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‬ ‫> ﺎ ﻛﻠ ﺪ ﺗﺄ ﺪ ﺗﻐ ﺮﻧﺎم را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻧﺎم ﻣﻮردﻧﻈﺮ را وارد ﻛﻨ ﺪ و ﻛﻠ ﺪ ﺗﺄ ﺪ ﺎ ﻛﻠ ﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‬ ‫>]ﺗﺄ ﺪ[ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻐ‪$$‬ﺮ ﻧﺎم‬ ‫]ﻣﻨﻮ ‪[3-x-8‬‬ ‫ﻧﺎم ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺎ= ﻟﺮزاﻧﻨﺪه ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪون ﺻﺪا و ﮔﻮﺷ را ﻧﻤ ﺘﻮان‬ ‫ﺗﻐ ﺮ داد‪.‬‬ ‫|‬ ‫• ﺗﻨﻈ‪$‬ﻢ ﺻﺪا‪ 5‬ﺟﻠﻮه ﻫﺎ‪ 5‬ﺻﻮﺗ ‪ :‬ﻣ ﺰان ﺻﺪا= ﺟﻠﻮه ﻫﺎ=‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺗ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.
PAGE 177
‫ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻣ و اﺑﺰار‬ ‫ﺑﺮﮔﺰ ﺪه‬ ‫]ﻣﻨﻮ ‪[1-9‬‬ ‫ا ﻦ ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ اﻣﻜﺎن اﻓﺰودن ﻣﻮارد ﻣﻮرد ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﺧﻮد ﺑﻪ ﻟ ﺴﺖ‬ ‫از ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻬ ﻪ ﺷﺪه را ﺑﺮا= ﺷﻤﺎ ﻓﺮاﻫﻢ ﻣ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣ‬ ‫ﻛﻪ ﻣﻨﻮ= ﺧﻮد را ا ﺠﺎد ﻛﺮد ﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﺳﺮ ﻌﺎً ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر‬ ‫دادن ﻛﻠ ﺪ ﭘ ﻤﺎ ﺶ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮد در ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻏ ﺮﻓﻌﺎل دﺳﺘﺮﺳ ﭘ ﺪا ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫! ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻣ و اﺑﺰار |‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ= ‪ SMS، MMS‬و ‪ MP3‬از ﻗﺒﻞ در ﻣﻮارد ﻣﻮرد ﻋﻼﻗﻪ وﺟﻮد دارد‪.‬‬ ‫‪72‬‬ ‫زﻧﮓ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫]ﻣﻨﻮ ‪[2-9‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎ ‪ 5‬ﻧﻮع زﻧﮓ ﻣ ﺘﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﺑﺮا= ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺗﻨﻈ ﻢ ‪B‬ﻨ ﺪ ﺗﺎ در زﻣﺎن‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪه ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 178
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫! ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻟ ﻞ ﻣﺴﺌﻠﻪ ﺳﺎزﮔﺎر=‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﻌﻀ از دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻫﺎ از‬ ‫ا ﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﭘﺸﺘ ﺒﺎﻧ ﻧﻜﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫دﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎ‪ 5‬ﻫﻨﺪزﻓﺮ‪5‬‬ ‫]ﻣﻨﻮ ‪[2-3-9‬‬ ‫ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﻟ ﺴﺖ دﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎ= ﻫﻨﺪزﻓﺮ را ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﻛﻨ ﺪ‬ ‫ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺳﺎزﮔﺎر اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ورود ﺑﻪ "دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻫﺎ= ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ" ﺎ ﻣﻨﻮ= دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻫﺎ=‬ ‫ﻫﻨﺪزﻓﺮ=‪ ،‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ز ﺮ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ دﺳﺖ ﺎﺑ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• اﺗﺼﺎل‪/‬ﻗﻄﻊ اﺗﺼﺎل‪ :‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﺑﻪ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻫﺎ=‬ ‫‪ Bluetooth‬اﺗﺼﺎل ﺎﺑ ﺪ‪.
PAGE 179
‫ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻣ و اﺑﺰار‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻣ و اﺑﺰار |‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪74‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫اﻓﺰودن ﻣﻮرد ﺟﺪ ﺪ‪ :‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﻚ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ‪Bluetooth‬‬ ‫ﺟﺪ ﺪ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺧﺘﺼﺎص دادن ﻧﺎم‪ :‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﻧﺎم ‪ Bluetooth‬را ﺗﻐ ﺮ‬ ‫دﻫ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈ‪$‬ﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان ﻣﻌﺘﺒﺮ‪/‬ﺗﻨﻈ‪$‬ﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان ﻧﺎﻣﻌﺘﺒﺮ‪ :‬ﺑ ﻦ‬ ‫دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻫﺎ= ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ اﺗﺼﺎل ﻣﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺗﻨﻈ ﻢ‬ ‫ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﺧﺪﻣﺎت‪ :‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﻛﻠ ﻪ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺗ را ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ‪ Bluetooth‬ﭘﺸﺘ ﺒﺎﻧ ﻣ ﺷﻮد ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬف‪ :‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ‪ Bluetooth‬را ﺣﺬف ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.
PAGE 180
‫ﻟ ﺴﺖ ﺧﺪﻣﺎت ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺷﺨﺼ ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﻓﺎ ﻞ‪،‬‬ ‫ﭼﺎپ ﺗﺼﻮ ﺮ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎن ﺳﺎز= را ﺎﻧﻪ و ﻣﻮارد= از ا ﻦ ﻗﺒ ﻞ را ﻣ‬ ‫ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮدم‬ ‫]ﻣﻨﻮ ‪[4-9‬‬ ‫از ﻃﺮ ﻖ ﻣﻮدم ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺪﻣﺎت ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ا= دﺳﺘ ﺎﺑ‬ ‫داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷ ﺪ‪ .‬در ﺻﻮرت ﺗﻤﺎ ﻞ ﺑﻪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎن ﺳﺎز=‬ ‫را ﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻧﻚ ﻫﺎ= اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗ ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻮپ ﻫﺎ= ا ﻨﺘﺮﻧﺘ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺪ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ= ﻣﻮدم ﺑﺮو ﺪ و ﻛﺎﺑﻞ را وﺻﻞ ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻣ و اﺑﺰار‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎت ﭘﺸﺘ‪$‬ﺒﺎﻧ ﺷﺪه‬ ‫]ﻣﻨﻮ ‪[4-3-9‬‬ ‫ا ﻦ ﻣﺎﺷ ﻦ ﺣﺴﺎب دارا= ‪ ٤‬ﻋﻤﻞ اﺻﻠ ﻣ ﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ :‬ﺟﻤﻊ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﻔﺮ ﻖ‪ ،‬ﺿﺮب‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﺴ ﻢ‪.
PAGE 181
‫ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻣ و اﺑﺰار‬ ‫ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻣ و اﺑﺰار |‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺪ ﻞ واﺣﺪ‬ ‫‪76‬‬ ‫]ﻣﻨﻮ ‪[6-9‬‬ ‫در ا ﻦ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ اﻣ‪d‬ﺎن ﺗﺒﺪ ﻞ اﻧﻮاع واﺣﺪﻫﺎ را ﺑﻪ واﺣﺪ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫دار ﺪ ا ﻦ واﺣﺪ ﻫﺎ ﻋﺒﺎرﺗﻨﺪ‪ :‬ارز را ﺞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻄﺢ‪ ،‬ﻃﻮل‪ ،‬وزن‪ ،‬دﻣﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ و ﺷﺘﺎب‪ ،‬ﻛﻔﺶ و ﭘﻮﺷﺎك‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر دادن ‪B‬ﻠ ﺪ <]اﻧﺘﺨﺎب[ ﻣ ﺘﻮاﻧ ﺪ ‪ d‬از ا ﻦ‬ ‫ﭼﻬﺎر واﺣﺪ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻧﻤﺎ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ارزش ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﺒﺪ ﻞ را ﺑﺮا= واﺣﺪ= ‪B‬ﻪ ﻣ ﺧﻮاﻫ ﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر‬ ‫دادن ﺑﺎ ‪ D‬و ‪ U‬اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫وارد ﻛﺮدن ﻧﻤﺎد "—" در ﻣﺒﺪل واﺣﺪ ﻏ ﺮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﻣ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 182
‫راﻧﻨﺪﮔ ‬ ‫]ﻣﻨﻮ ‪[3-8-9‬‬ ‫ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﭘ ﻐﺎم ﮔ ﺮ را در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ راﻧﻨﺪﮔ ﺗﻨﻈ ﻢ ‪B‬ﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪q‬ﺎرﺑﺮ ‪1‬و ‪2‬‬ ‫]ﻣﻨﻮ ‪[5/4-8-9‬‬ ‫ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﭘ ﻐﺎم ﮔ ﺮ را ﺑﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪا= ﺧﻮدﺗﺎن در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬ ‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪B‬ﺎرﺑﺮ ﺗﻨﻈ ﻢ ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ز ﺮ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ‬ ‫• ﻓﻌﺎل‬ ‫ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘ ﻐﺎم ﮔ ﺮ را ‪B‬ﻪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪B‬ﺮد ﺪ ﻓﻌﺎل‬ ‫‪B‬ﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺷﻨ‪$‬ﺪن ﺻﺪا‪ 5‬راﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﺻﺪا= راﻫﻨﻤﺎ را ‪B‬ﻪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪B‬ﺮده ا ﺪ ﺑﺸﻨﻮ ﺪ‪.
PAGE 183
‫ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻣ و اﺑﺰار‬ ‫• ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﭘ‪$‬ﺎم ‪q‬ﻮﺗﺎه‪ :‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﭘ ﺎم ‪B‬ﻮﺗﺎه ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎس‬ ‫ﮔ ﺮﻧﺪه ا= ‪B‬ﻪ ﭘ ﺎم ﮔﺬاﺷﺘﻪ اﺳﺖ ﺑﻔﺮﺳﺘ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻣ و اﺑﺰار |‬ ‫زﻣﺎن زﻧﮓ زدن‬ ‫‪78‬‬ ‫]ﻣﻨﻮ ‪[7-8-9‬‬ ‫ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﻣﺪت زﻣﺎن زﻧﮓ زدن ﮔﻮﺷ ﺧﻮد را در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘ ﻐﺎم‬ ‫ﮔ ﺮ ﺗﻨﻈ ﻢ ‪B‬ﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﻌﺪ از ﺳﻪ ﺛﺎﻧ‪$‬ﻪ‪ :‬ﮔﻮﺷ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ از ﺳﻪ ﺛﺎﻧ ﻪ درﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬ ‫ﭘ ﻐﺎم ﮔ ﺮ ﻓﻌﺎل ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﻌﺪ از ﭘﻨﺞ ﺛﺎﻧ‪$‬ﻪ‪ :‬ﮔﻮﺷ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ از ﭘﻨﺞ ﺛﺎﻧ ﻪ درﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬ ‫ﭘ ﻐﺎم ﮔ ﺮ ﻓﻌﺎل ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ازده ﺛﺎﻧ‪$‬ﻪ‪ :‬ﮔﻮﺷ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ از ده ﺛﺎﻧ ﻪ درﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘ ﻐﺎم‬ ‫ﮔ ﺮ ﻓﻌﺎل ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.
PAGE 184
‫ﻣﺮورﮔﺮ‬ ‫ﭘ‪$‬ﻤﺎ ﺶ ﺑﺎ ﻛﺎوﺷﮕﺮ ‪WAP‬‬ ‫ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠ ﺪﻫﺎ= ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺎ ﻣﻨﻮ= ﻛﺎوﺷﮕﺮ ‪ WAP‬در‬ ‫ا ﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻛﻠ‪$‬ﺪﻫﺎ‪ 5‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ= ا ﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﻛﻠ ﺪﻫﺎ= ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺗﻔﺎوت دارد‪.‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮورﮔﺮ‬ ‫‪q‬ﻠ‪$‬ﺪ‬ ‫‪UD‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮح‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺤﺪوده ﻣﻨﺪرﺟﺎت ﻣ رود‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب و ﻋﻤﻠ ﺎت را ﺗﺎ ﺪ‬ ‫ﻣ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 185
‫ﻣﺮورﮔﺮ‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻣﻨﻮ‪ 5‬ﻛﺎوﺷﮕﺮ ‪WAP‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ= ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ= ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻣﻮﺑﺎ ﻞ در‬ ‫دﺳﺘﺮس اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫! ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ= ﻛﺎوﺷﮕﺮ ‪ WAP‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﻛﺎوﺷﮕﺮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻔﺎوت ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮورﮔﺮ |‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ اﺻﻠ ‬ ‫‪80‬‬ ‫]ﻣﻨﻮ *‪[1-‬‬ ‫از ا ﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﺮا= اﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ اﺻﻠ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻧﻤﺎ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺒ‪d‬ﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ اﺻﻠ ﺳﺎ ﺘ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ در ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻓﻌﺎل‬ ‫ﻓﻌﻠ ﺗﻌ ﻦ ﮔﺮد ﺪه اﺳﺖ‪ .‬اﮔﺮ آن را در ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻓﻌﺎل ﺗﻌ ﻦ‬ ‫ﻧﻜﺮده ﺑﺎﺷ ﺪ‪ ،‬اراﺋﻪ دﻫﻨﺪه ﺳﺮو ﺲ آن را ﺗﻌ ﻦ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﻛﺮد‪.
PAGE 186
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫رﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ‪URL‬‬ ‫]ﻣﻨﻮ *‪[3-‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘ ﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎ ﺖ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ وﺻﻞ ﺷﻮ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﺲ از وارد ﻛﺮدن آدرس ‪ URL‬ﺧﺎص‪ ،‬ﻛﻠ ﺪ ﺗﺄ ﺪ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ‬ ‫]ﻣﻨﻮ *‪[1-4-‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺷﺒﻜﻪ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮا= اﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﻪ ا ﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮا= ﺑﻌﻀ از اﭘﺮاﺗﻮرﻫﺎ ﻧﻤﺎ ﻪ ﻫﺎ= ﭘ ﺶ ﻓﺮض وﺟﻮد دارد ﻛﻪ‬ ‫در ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ذﺧ ﺮه ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺗﻐ ﺮ ﻧﺎم ﻧﻤﺎ ﻪ ﻫﺎ= ﭘ ﺶ‬ ‫ﻓﺮض اﻣﻜﺎن ﭘﺬ ﺮ ﻧ ﺴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺮ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻨﻮ= ز ﺮ ﻣ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻌﺎل ‪q‬ﻨ‪$‬ﺪ‪ :‬ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ را ﻓﻌﺎل ﻣ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 187
‫ﻣﺮورﮔﺮ |‬ ‫ﻣﺮورﮔﺮ‬ ‫‪82‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻨﻈ‪$‬ﻤﺎت‪ :‬ﺑﺮا= و ﺮا ﺶ و ﺗﻐ ﺮ ﺗﻨﻈ ﻤﺎت ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ‬ ‫‪ WAP‬از آن اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ اﺻﻠ ‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ اﺟﺎزه ﻣ ﺪﻫﺪ ‪B‬ﻪ آدرس‬‫ا ﻨﺘﺮﻧﺘ )‪ (URL‬ﺳﺎ ﺖ ﻣﻄﻠﻮب ﺧﻮد را وارد و از آن‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان ﺻﻔﺤﻪ اﺻﻠ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻓﺮﻣﺎ ﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺿﺮورت ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎ ﭗ "‪ "HTTP://‬ﻧﺪار ﺪ ز ﺮا ﻣﺮورﮔﺮ ‪WAP‬‬ ‫آﻧﺮا ﺧﻮدﺑﺨﻮد اﻧﺠﺎم ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ داد‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ‪ :‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣ ﺘﻮاﻧ ﺪ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻧﻤﺎ ﺪ‪.
PAGE 188
‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘﻨﻬﺎن‬ ‫]ﻣﻨﻮ *‪[2-4-‬‬ ‫ﻛﻮﻛ ‬ ‫]ﻣﻨﻮ *‪[3-4-‬‬ ‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت و ﺧﺪﻣﺎت ﺑﻪ دﺳﺖ آﻣﺪه ﺷﻤﺎ در ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘﻨﻬﺎن‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ذﺧ ﺮه ﻣ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮورﮔﺮ‬ ‫ا ﻦ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺎ ﺧﺪﻣﺎت ﺑﻪ دﺳﺖ آﻣﺪه در ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘﻨﻬﺎن ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ذﺧ ﺮه ﻣ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫|‬ ‫‪ (APN) :APN‬را ﺑﺮا= ورود ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒ‪d‬ﻪ وارد ‪B‬ﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻮ ﺖ ﻋﺒﻮر‪ :‬ﻫﻮ ﺖ ‪B‬ﺎرﺑﺮ را ﺑﺮا= ﺗﻌ ﻦ ﺳﺮور ‪ APN‬ﺧﻮد‬ ‫وارد ﻧﻤﺎ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫رﻣﺰ ﻛﺎرﺑﺮ‪B :‬ﻠﻤﻪ رﻣﺰ ﻋﺒﻮر را ﺑﺮا= ورود ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮور ‪ APN‬وارد‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺗﻨﻈ‪$‬ﻤﺎت ﭘﺮا‪q‬ﺴ ‬‫ﭘﺮاﻛﺴ ‪ :‬ﭘﺮاﻛﺴ را ﻓﻌﺎل ﺎ ﻟﻐﻮ ﻣ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 189
‫ﻣﺮورﮔﺮ‬ ‫ﭘﺎ ‪q‬ﺮدن ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫]ﻣﻨﻮ *‪[4-4-‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎم ﺑﺎﻓﺖ ذﺧ ﺮه ﺷﺪه در ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘﻨﻬﺎن ﺗﻠﻔﻦ را ﭘﺎك‬ ‫ﻣ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫! ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘﻨﻬﺎن ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺑﺎﻓﺮدار اﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮا= ذﺧ ﺮه ﻣﻮﻗﺖ داده‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬف ﻛﻮﻛ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫]ﻣﻨﻮ *‪[5-4-‬‬ ‫اﻣﻨ‪$‬ﺖ‬ ‫]ﻣﻨﻮ *‪[6-4-‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮورﮔﺮ |‬ ‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎ ﻠﻬﺎ= ذﺧ ﺮه ﺷﺪه در ﻛﻮﻛ را ﭘﺎك ﻣ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪84‬‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺘ از ﮔﻮاﻫ ﻫﺎ= ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﻣ ﺸﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫• اﻋﺘﺒﺎر‪ :‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﻟ ﺴﺖ ﮔﻮاﻫ ﻫﺎ= ﻣﺠﺎز را ﺑﺒ ﻨ ﺪ‬ ‫ﻛﻪ درﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ذﺧ ﺮه ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪.
PAGE 190
‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﺗﻤﺎس‬ ‫ا ﻦ ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ اﻣﻜﺎن ﻣ دﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ‪ 10‬ﺗﻤﺎس ﭘﺎﺳﺦ داده‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺪه اﺧ ﺮ را ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨ ﻦ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﺷﻤﺎره را ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﻧﻤﺎ ﺪ و ﺑﻪ آن ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﮕ ﺮ ﺪ‬ ‫ ﺎ آن را در دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ آدرس ذﺧ ﺮه ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﻧﺎم ﺟﺪ ﺪ= را ﺑﺮا= ﺷﻤﺎره وارد ﻛﻨ ﺪ و ﻫﺮ دو را در‬ ‫دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ آدرس ذﺧ ﺮه ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﺑﺮا= ا ﻦ ﺷﻤﺎره ﭘ ﺎم ﺑﻔﺮﺳﺘ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﺗﻤﺎس را از ﻟ ﺴﺖ ﺣﺬف ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.
PAGE 191
‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﺗﻤﺎس‬ ‫• ﻧﺎم ﺟﺪ ﺪ= را ﺑﺮا= ﺷﻤﺎره وارد ﻛﻨ ﺪ و ﻫﺮ دو را در دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ‬ ‫آدرس ذﺧ ﺮه ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﭘ ﺎﻣ را ﺑﺮا= ا ﻦ ﺷﻤﺎره ارﺳﺎل ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻤﺎس را از ﻟ ﺴﺖ ﺣﺬف ﻧﻤﺎ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎم ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ‬ ‫]ﻣﻨﻮ ‪[4-0‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ا ﻦ ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﻟ ﺴﺖ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ را ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه‬ ‫ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﺗﻤﺎس |‬ ‫ﺣﺬف ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ‪ 5‬اﺧ‪$‬ﺮ‬ ‫‪86‬‬ ‫]ﻣﻨﻮ ‪[5-0‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ اﻣﻜﺎن ﺣﺬف ﻟ ﺴﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ= ﺑ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ و در ﺎﻓﺘ‬ ‫را ﻣ دﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﻟ ﺴﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ= ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه و ﻫﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ را ﻜﺠﺎ ﺣﺬف ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.
PAGE 192
‫ﺗﻨﻈ‪$‬ﻤﺎت‬ ‫)ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﺳ‪$‬ﻢ ‪q‬ﺎرت اﺳﺖ(‬ ‫• ﺗﻨﻈ‪$‬ﻢ ﺗﻌﺮﻓﻪ‪ :‬ﻧﻮع ﭘﻮل و واﺣﺪ ﭘﻮﻟ را ﻣ ﺘﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﺗﻌ ﻦ‬ ‫‪B‬ﻨ ﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮا= ﺑﺪﺳﺖ آوردن ﻧﺮخ ﺗﻐ ﺮ واﺣﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺷﺒ‪d‬ﻪ ﺧﻮ ﺶ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﮕ ﺮ ﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮا= اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﭘﻮل ﺎ واﺣﺪ در ا ﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﻪ ﭘ ﻦ‬ ‫‪B‬ﺪ ‪ 2‬ﻧ ﺎز دار ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻨﻈ‪$‬ﻢ اﻋﺘﺒﺎر‪ :‬ا ﻦ ﺳﺮو ﺲ ﺷﺒ‪d‬ﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ اﻣ‪d‬ﺎن‬ ‫ﻣ دﻫﺪ ﺑﺮ ﻣﺒﻨﺎ= رﻗﻢ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ‪B‬ﺎر‪B‬ﺮد ﮔﻮﺷ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈ ﻢ ﮔﺮدد‪ .
PAGE 193
‫ﺗﻨﻈ‪$‬ﻤﺎت‬ ‫ﺗﺎر ﺦ و ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫]ﻣﻨﻮ ‪[1- #‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠ ﺎت ﻣﺮﺑﺮط ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎر ﺦ ووﻗﺖ را ﻣ ﺘﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﺗﻨﻈ ﻢ ‪B‬ﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎر ﺦ‬ ‫• ﺗﻨﻈ‪$‬ﻢ ﺗﺎر ﺦ‬ ‫]ﻣﻨﻮ ‪[1-1- #‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈ‪$‬ﻤﺎت |‬ ‫• ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺶ ﺗﺎر ﺦ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺗﺎر ﺦ را ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ‪DD/MM/YYYY, MM/DD/YYYY,‬‬ ‫‪ .YYYY/MM/DD‬ﻣ ﺘﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﺗﻨﻈ ﻢ ‪B‬ﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪ :D‬روز ‪ :M /‬ﻣﺎه ‪ :Y /‬ﺳﺎل(‬ ‫‪88‬‬ ‫اﮔﺮ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه روﺷﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣ ﻛﻪ از ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻧﻤ ﻛﻨ ﺪ ﻧ ﺮو را ذﺧ ﺮه ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫زﺑﺎن‬ ‫ﺗﺎر ﺦ روز را ﻣ ﺘﻮاﻧ ﺪ وارد ‪B‬ﻨ ﺪ‪.
PAGE 194
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈ‪$‬ﻤﺎت‬ ‫•‬ ‫اﮔﺮ ﻣﺸﻐﻮل ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ ‫در ﺻﻮرت ﻣﺸﻐﻮل ﺑﻮدن‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﺎ= ﺻﻮﺗ را اﻧﺘﻘﺎل‬ ‫ﻣ ﺪﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫در ﺻﻮرت ﻋﺪم ﭘﺎﺳﺦ‬ ‫درﺻﻮرﺗ ‪d‬ﻪ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﻧﺪﻫ ﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ را اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﻣ ﺪﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫اﮔﺮ در دﺳﺘﺮس ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‬ ‫وﻗﺘ ‪d‬ﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺎ در دﺳﺘﺮس ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ را اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﻣ ﺪﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎم ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ‪ 5‬داده‬ ‫ﺑﺪون ﻗ ﺪ و ﺷﺮط ﺑﻪ ﻚ ﺷﻤﺎره ﺑﺎ ارﺗﺒﺎط ‪B‬ﺎﻣﭙ ﻮﺗﺮ=‬ ‫اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﻣ ﺪﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ‪ 5‬ﻓﺎ‪q‬ﺲ‬ ‫ﺑﺪون ﻗ ﺪ و ﺷﺮط ﺑﻪ ﻚ ﺷﻤﺎره ﺑﺎ ارﺗﺒﺎط ﻓ‪d‬ﺲ اﻧﺘﻘﺎل‬ ‫ﻣ ﺪﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ز ﺮ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ= اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﻣ;ﺎﻟﻤﻪ در ز ﺮ ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪.
PAGE 195
‫ﺗﻨﻈ‪$‬ﻤﺎت‬ ‫• ﻟﻐﻮ‬ ‫اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﺗﻤﺎس را ﻏ ﺮﻓﻌﺎل ﻣ ﺳﺎزد‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎره را ﺑﻔﺮﺳﺘ‪$‬ﺪ‬ ‫)ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒ;ﻪ و اﺷﺘﺮا ﻣﺮﺑﻮط اﺳﺖ(‬ ‫• ﻧﻤﺎ ﺶ وﺿﻌ‪$‬ﺖ‬ ‫وﺿﻊ اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﺗﻤﺎس را ﻣ ﺘﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﺑﺒ ﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻨﻈ‪$‬ﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺒ;ﻪ‬ ‫اﮔﺮ ا ﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣ ‪d‬ﻨ ﺪ ﺷﻤﺎره ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺗﺎن را‬ ‫ﻣ ﺘﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮو ﺲ دو ﺧﻄ ‪ ،‬رو= ‪ d‬از ﺧﻄﻮط‬ ‫‪ 1‬و ‪ 2‬ﺑﻔﺮﺳﺘ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻌﺎل‬ ‫در ﺻﻮرت ﻓﻌﺎل ﺑﻮدن ا ﻦ ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﺗﻤﺎس ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ د ﮕﺮ ﺷﻤﺎره ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ رو= ﺗﻠﻔﻦ دوم ﻧﺸﺎن داده‬ ‫ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.
PAGE 196
‫ﺑﻮق دﻗ‪$‬ﻘﻪ ﺷﻤﺎر‬ ‫]ﻣﻨﻮ ‪[5-4- #‬‬ ‫اﮔﺮروﺷﻦ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪B‬ﺮد ﺪ ﺣ ﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﺪت ﻣ‪d‬ﺎﻟﻤﻪ را‬ ‫در ﺟﺮ ﺎن ﻣ‪d‬ﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻨ ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ دﻗ ﻘﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺻﺪا= ﻣﺨﺼﻮص‬ ‫ﻣ ﺘﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﻣﺘﻮﺟﻪ ﺷﻮ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻏ‪$‬ﺮ ﻓﻌﺎل‬ ‫در ا ﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ اﮔﺮ ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﺮ ﻗﺮار ﻧﮕﺮدد ﺷﻤﺎره ﮔ ﺮ= ﻣﺠﺪدا ً‬ ‫آﻏﺎز ﻧﺨﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻣﻨ‪$‬ﺖ‬ ‫در ﺧﻮاﺳﺖ ‪q‬ﺪ ‪PIN‬‬ ‫]ﻣﻨﻮ ‪[5- #‬‬ ‫]ﻣﻨﻮ ‪[1-5- #‬‬ ‫در ا ﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ را ﺗﻨﻈ ﻢ ﻛﻨ ﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر= ﻛﻪ زﻣﺎن‬ ‫روﺷﻦ ﺷﺪن ﻛﺪ ﭘ ﻦ ﺳ ﻢ ﻛﺎرت را درﺧﻮاﺳﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .
PAGE 197
‫ﺗﻨﻈ‪$‬ﻤﺎت‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈ‪$‬ﻤﺎت |‬ ‫‪ .1‬در ﻣﻨﻮ= ﻣﻌ ﺎرﻫﺎ= اﻣﻨ ﺘ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﺎﺿﺎ= ﭘ ﻦ ‪B‬ﺪ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب‬ ‫‪B‬ﻨ ﺪ و ﺳﭙﺲ >]اﻧﺘﺨﺎب[ را ﻓﺸﺎردﻫ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺗﻨﻈ ﻢ ﻓﻌﺎل‪/‬ﻏ ﺮﻓﻌﺎل‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬اﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮاﻫ ﺪ وﺿﻊ ﺗﻨﻈ ﻢ ﺷﺪ را ﺗﻐ ﺮ ﺑﺪﻫ ﺪ زﻣﺎﻧ ‪d‬ﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ را روﺷﻦ ﻣ ‪d‬ﻨ ﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺪ ﭘ ﻦ ‪B‬ﺪ را وارد ‪B‬ﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬اﮔﺮ ﺑ ﺸﺘﺮ از ‪ 3‬ﺑﺎر ﭘ ﻦ ‪B‬ﺪ ﻏﻠﻂ وارد ‪B‬ﻨ ﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻗﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬اﮔﺮ ﭘ ﻦ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺷﻮد ﺑﻪ ‪ PUK‬ﻛﺪ ﻧ ﺎز ﺧﻮاﻫ ﺪ‬ ‫داﺷﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ PUK .
PAGE 198
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎره ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‬ ‫)ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﺳ‪$‬ﻢ ‪q‬ﺎرت(‬ ‫]ﻣﻨﻮ ‪[5-5- #‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ= ﺧﺮوﺟ را ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎره ﻫﺎ= ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﻣ ﺘﻮاﻧ ﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺪود ‪B‬ﻨ ﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎره ﻫﺎ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﺪ ﭘ ﻦ ‪ 2‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺖ‬ ‫ﻣ ﺸﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻌﺎل ‪q‬ﺮدن‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ= ﺧﺮوﺟ را ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎره ﻫﺎ= ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﻣ ﺘﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﻣﺤﺪود ‪B‬ﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈ‪$‬ﻤﺎت‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎس ﻫﺎ‪ 5‬ﺧﺮوﺟ ﺑ‪$‬ﻦ اﻟﻤﻠﻠ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم روﻣ‪$‬ﻨﮓ‬ ‫ﺳﺮو ﺲ ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻋ ﺖ ﺑﺮا= ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ= ﺧﺮوﺟ ﺑ ﻦ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻠﻠ ﺑﻪ اﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎ= ‪B‬ﺸﻮر ﺧﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ‪ 5‬ورود‪5‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮو ﺲ ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻋ ﺖ ﺑﺮا= ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ= وارده‪.
PAGE 199
‫ﺗﻨﻈ‪$‬ﻤﺎت‬ ‫• ﻏ‪$‬ﺮﻓﻌﺎل ﻛﺮدن‬ ‫ﻣ ﺘﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺷﻤﺎره ﮔ ﺮ= ﻣﻌ ﻦ را ﻟﻐﻮ ﺑ‪d‬ﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺷﻤﺎره ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺷﻤﺎره ﻫﺎ ‪B‬ﻪ ﺑﻤﺜﺎﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎره ﻣﻌ ﻦ ﺷﻤﺎره‬ ‫ﮔ ﺮ= ﺷﺪه را ﻣ ﺘﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﺑﺒ ﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈ‪$‬ﻤﺎت |‬ ‫ﺗﻐ‪$$‬ﺮ ‪q‬ﺪ‬ ‫‪94‬‬ ‫]ﻣﻨﻮ ‪[6-5- #‬‬ ‫‪) PIN‬ﺷﻤﺎره ﻫﻮ ﺖ ﺷﺨﺼ اﺳﺖ( ‪B‬ﻪ ﺑﺮا= ﻣﻤﺎﻧﻌﺖ ﺗﻤﺎس‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ‪B‬ﻨﻨﺪه ﻏ ﺮ ﻣﺠﺎز ﺑ‪d‬ﺎرﺑﺮده ﻣ ﺸﻮد‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣ ﺘﻮاﻧ ﺪ ‪B‬ﺪﻫﺎ= ﺗﻤﺎس را ﺗﻐ ﺮ ﺑﺪﻫ ﺪ‪ :‬ﻛﺪ ﭘ‪$‬ﻦ‪q ،‬ﺪ ﭘ‪$‬ﻦ ‪،2‬‬ ‫‪q‬ﺪ اﻣﻨ‪$‬ﺘ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 200
‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺑﺎﻧﺪ‬ ‫• ‪EGSM/DCS‬‬ ‫]ﻣﻨﻮ ‪[2-6- #‬‬ ‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﻌ ﺖ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ‪EGSM/DCS‬‬ ‫• ‪PCS only‬‬ ‫را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﻌ ﺖ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ‬ ‫‪ EGSM/PCS‬را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫روﺷﻦ ﻛﺮدن‬ ‫]ﻣﻨﻮ ‪[1-7- #‬‬ ‫اﮔﺮ ا ﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ زﻣﺎن ﻛﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ را روﺷﻦ‬ ‫ﻣ ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر در ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ‪ GPRS‬ﺛﺒﺖ ﻣ‬ ‫ﺷﻮد‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺷﺮوع ‪ WAP‬ﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ اﺗﺼﺎل ﺗﻠﻔﻨ را ﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬اﺗﺼﺎل‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺑﺮﻗﺮار ﻣ ﺷﻮد و اﻣﻜﺎن اﻧﺘﻘﺎل داده ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﺮاﻫﻢ ﻣ ﮔﺮدد‪ .
PAGE 201
‫ﺗﻨﻈ‪$‬ﻤﺎت‬ ‫وﺿﻌ‪$‬ﺖ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫]ﻣﻨﻮ ‪[8- #‬‬ ‫ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﻓﻀﺎ= آزاد و ﻣﻘﺪار ﻓﻀﺎ= ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻫﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎن ذﺧ ﺮه‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ داﺧﻠ ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﻣﺪ ﺎ و ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫ﺧﺎرﺟ را ﺑﺮرﺳ ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪ .‬ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮ= ﻣﻜﺎن ذﺧ ﺮه‬ ‫ﺑﺮو ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈ‪$‬ﻤﺎت |‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈ‪$‬ﻢ ﻣﺠﺪد ‪q‬ﺎرﺧﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫‪96‬‬ ‫]ﻣﻨﻮ ‪[9- #‬‬ ‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﻨﻈ ﻤﺎت ﭘ ﺶ ﻓﺮض ﻛﺎرﺧﺎﻧﻪ را ﻣ ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﺑﺎز ﺎﺑ‬ ‫ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮا= ﻓﻌﺎل ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﻣﺠﺪد ﺗﻨﻈ ﻤﺎت ‪B‬ﺎرﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ‪B‬ﺪ اﻣﻨ ﺘ ﻧ ﺎزدار ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺎز ﺎﺑ ﺗﻨﻈ‪$‬ﻤﺎت ﭘ‪$‬ﺶ ﻓﺮض‪ :‬اﻣﻜﺎن ﺑﺎز ﺎﺑ ﺗﻨﻈ ﻤﺎت‬ ‫ﭘ ﺶ ﻓﺮض را ﺑﺮا= ﺷﻤﺎ ﻓﺮاﻫﻢ ﻣ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 202
‫ﻟﻮازم ﺟﺎﻧﺒ ‬ ‫ﻟﻮازم ﺟﺎﻧﺒ ﻣﺘﻌﺪد= ﺑﺮا= ﮔﻮﺷ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد اﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺮ اﺳﺎس ﻧ ﺎز ﺷﺨﺼ ﻣ ﺘﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﻫﺮ ‪B‬ﺪام از آﻧﻬﺎ را ﺗﻬ ﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﺋ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪q‬ﺎﺑﻞ اﻧﺘﻘﺎل اﻃﻼﻋﺎت‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ا ﻦ ‪B‬ﺎﺑﻞ ﻣ ﺘﻮاﻧ ﺪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﺒﺎدل‬ ‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﮔﻮﺷ ﺧﻮد را ﺑﻪ را ﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﺨﺼ ﺧﻮد ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﺋ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫! ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫• ﻓﻘﻂ از ﻟﻮازم ﺟﺎﻧﺒ ‪ LG‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻧﻤﺎﺋ ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﺪم اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻟﻮازم ﺟﺎﻧﺒ اﺻﻠ ﮔﺎراﻧﺘ ﮔﻮﺷ ﺷﻤﺎ را از درﺟﻪ اﻋﺘﺒﺎر ﺳﺎﻗﻂ ﻣ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻮازم ﺟﺎﻧﺒ ﻣﻤ‪d‬ﻦ اﺳﺖ در ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻔﺎوت ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺮا= اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺑ ﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮ‪B‬ﺰ ﺳﺮو ﺲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﮕ ﺮ ﺪ‪.
PAGE 203
‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻓﻨ ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻮﻣ ‬ ‫ﻧﺎم ﻣﺤﺼﻮل‪KG320 :‬‬ ‫ﺳ ﺴﺘﻢ‪GSM 900 / DCS 1800 / PCS 1900 :‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮارت ﻣﺤ‪$‬ﻂ‬ ‫ﺣﺪ ا‪B‬ﺜﺮ‪+55°C :‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪ اﻗﻞ‪-10°C :‬‬ ‫‪98‬‬
PAGE 204
99
PAGE 205
MEMO 100
PAGE 206
ENGLISH KG320 USER GUIDE This manual may differ from the phone depending on the phone software version and service provider used.
PAGE 207
CONTENTS | CONTENTS INTRODUCTION ..........................................................5 IN-CALL MENU..........................................................27 M FOR YOUR SAFETY .....................................................6 During a Call .......................................................................... 27 Conference Calls .................................................................. 28 C V V M P V GUIDELINES FOR SAFE AND EFFICIENT USE .....7 KG320 FEATURES................
PAGE 208
Camera [Menu 4-1].............................................................. 40 Video camera [Menu 4-2] .................................................. 41 Voice recorder [Menu 4-3] ................................................ 42 MP3 [Menu 4-4] .................................................................... 43 Photo album [Menu 4-5] ..................................................... 45 Video album [Menu 4-6] ..................................................... 46 MESSAGES.................
PAGE 209
CONTENTS | TOOLS ..........................................................................62 CONTENTS Favourites [Menu 9-1] ......................................................... 62 Alarm clock [Menu 9-2] ...................................................... 62 Bluetooth [Menu 9-3] .......................................................... 62 Modem [Menu 9-4] .............................................................. 64 Calculator [Menu 9-5] .......................................................
PAGE 210
INTRODUCTION This user’s guide contains important information on the use and operation of this phone. Please read all the information carefully for optimal performance and to prevent any damage to or misuse of the phone. Any changes or modifications not expressly approved in this user’s guide could void your warranty for this equipment.
PAGE 211
FOR YOUR SAFETY | FOR YOUR SAFETY Warning Caution • Mobile Phones must be switched off at all times in aircrafts. • Switch off the phone in any area where required by special regulations. For example, do not use your phone in hospitals or it may affect sensitive medical equipment. • Do not hold the phone in your hand while driving. • Do not use your phone near petrol stations, fuel depots, chemical plants or blasting operations. • For your safety, use ONLY specified ORIGINAL batteries and chargers.
PAGE 212
GUIDELINES FOR SAFE AND EFFICIENT USE • While there may be differences between the SAR levels of various LG phone models, they are all designed to meet the relevant guidelines for exposure to radio waves. Exposure to radio frequency energy • The SAR limit recommended by the International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP) is 2W/kg averaged over ten (10) gram of tissue.
PAGE 213
GUIDELINES FOR SAFE AND EFFICIENT USE Product care and maintenance | GUIDELINES FOR SAFE AND EFFICIENT USE WARNING! Only use batteries, chargers and accessories approved for use with this particular phone model. The use of any other types may invalidate any approval or warranty applying to the phone, and may be dangerous. • Do not disassemble this unit. Take it to a qualified service technician when repair work is required.
PAGE 214
Road safety To enjoy optimum performance with minimum power consumption please: Check the laws and regulations on the use of mobile phones in the areas when you drive. • Do not hold the antenna when the phone is in use. If you hold it, it can affect call quality, it may also cause the phone to operate at a higher power level than needed and shorten talk and standby times. • Do not use a hand-held phone while driving.
PAGE 215
GUIDELINES FOR SAFE AND EFFICIENT USE | GUIDELINES FOR SAFE AND EFFICIENT USE Avoid damage to your hearing In aircraft B Damage to your hearing can occur if you are exposed to loud sound for long periods of time. We therefore recommend that you do not turn on or off the handset close to your ear. We also recommend that music and call volumes are set to a reasonable level. Wireless devices can cause interference in aircraft. • Blasting area Do not use the phone where blasting is in progress.
PAGE 216
Battery information and care • Use only LG batteries and chargers. LG chargers are designed to maximize the battery life. • Do not disassemble or short-circuit the battery pack. • Keep the metal contacts of the battery pack clean. • Replace the battery when it no longer provides acceptable performance. The battery pack may be recharged hundreds of times until it needs replacing. • Recharge the battery if it has not been used for a long time to maximize usability.
PAGE 217
KG320 FEATURES Part of the phone | KG320 FEATURES 1. Earpiece 5 2. Display screen • Top: Icons showing signal strength, battery level and various other functions. • Bottom: Soft key indications 6 3. Alpha numeric keys • In standby mode: Input numbers to dial 7 Hold down: 0 – International calls 1 – Dial Voice mail centre. 2 to 9 – Speed dials * – Activate Timer in Take picture mode. # – Enables the flash light in the camera mode.
PAGE 218
5. Cable Connector/Battery Charging Connector Please ensure phone is powered on and in idle mode before connecting the USB cable. 6. Internal loudspeaker Listen to MP3 player without headphones 7. Camera and Multimedia hot key Activates the camera (long press) and Multimedia menu (short press) directly.
PAGE 219
KG320 FEATURES 1 2 | KG320 FEATURES 3. Soft keys These keys perform the function Indicated in the bottom of the display. 4 5 1. Navigation key • In standby mode: U Briefly: List of Favourites D Briefly: List of Contacts R Briefly: List of Messages L Briefly: List of Profiles Hold down: Activate/Deactivate Vibrate mode • In menu: scroll up & down 2. Confirm key If you press this key shortly, you can view top menu. 14 R 3 4. Send key • Dial a phone number and answer a call.
PAGE 220
Rear view 2. Flash 3. Camera lens 4. Side camera key 5. SIM Card Socket | KG320 FEATURES 1. Battery 6.
PAGE 221
KG320 FEATURES Display Information | Icon area KG320 FEATURES 16 Text and graphic area Menu Contacts The screen displays several icons. These are described below. On-Screen Icons Icon Description Tells you the strength of the network signal. ❈ Soft key indications Area Description First line Displays various icons. Middle lines Display messages, instructions and any information that you enter, such as number to be dialled.
PAGE 222
Icon Description Icon Description General menu in profile. You can use GPRS service. Loud menu in profile. Shows that you are using a roaming service. Silent menu in profile. The alarm has been set and is on. You can divert a call. Tells you the status of the battery. Headset menu in profile. You have received a text message. Indicates that the phone is accessing the WAP. You have received a voice message. Indicates that you are using GPRS. You can view your schedule.
PAGE 223
INSTALLATION Installing the SIM card and the handset battery | Make sure the power is off before you remove the battery. INSTALLATION 1. Remove the battery cover. Press and slide the battery cover toward the bottom of the phone, and remove the battery cover. 3. Install the SIM card. Insert the SIM card into the holder. Slide the SIM card into the SIM card holder. Make sure that the SIM card is inserted properly and that the gold contact area on the card is facing downwards.
PAGE 224
! Caution When you install or remove the battery, you should be careful of the sharp edge of battery cover. Charging the Battery Before connecting the travel adapter to the phone you must first install the battery. 1. Ensure the battery is fully charged before using the phone for the first time. 2. With the arrow facing you as shown in the diagram push the plug on the battery adapter into the socket on the side of the phone until it clicks into place. 3.
PAGE 225
INSTALLATION ! Warning • Unplug the power cord and charger during lightning storms to avoid electric shock or fire. | • Make sure that no sharp-edged items such as animal teeth or nails, come into contact with the battery. There is a risk of this causing a fire. INSTALLATION • Do not place or answer calls while charging the phone as it may short-circuit the phone and/or cause electric shock or fire. • When inserting/ removing the SIM card, you should turn off the phone.
PAGE 226
GENERAL FUNCTIONS Making a Call 1. Make sure your phone is powered on. 2. Enter a phone number including the area code. 1. Press and hold the 0 key for the international prefix. The ‘+’ character can be replaced with the international access code. 4. When you want to finish, press the E key. 2. Enter the country code, area code, and the phone number. Making a call from the call history list. 3. Press the S key. 1.
PAGE 227
GENERAL FUNCTIONS | GENERAL FUNCTIONS Answering a Call Vibrate Mode (Quick) T When you receive a call, the phone rings and the flashing phone icon appears on the screen. If the caller can be identified, the caller’s phone number (or name/photo, if stored in your Address Book) is displayed. Vibrate Mode can be activated by pressing and holding the left navigation key. Signal Strength T k m c d r A 1. Press the S key or the left soft key to answer an incoming call.
PAGE 228
Changing the Text Input Mode This mode allows you to enter words with only one keystroke per letter. Each key on the keypad has more than one letter. The T9 mode automatically compares your keystrokes with an internal linguistic dictionary to determine the correct word, thus requiring far fewer keystrokes than the traditional ABC mode. 1. When you are in a field that allows characters to be entered, you will notice the text input mode indicator in the upper right corner of the display.
PAGE 229
GENERAL FUNCTIONS | GENERAL FUNCTIONS 1. When you are in the T9 predictive text input mode, start entering a word by pressing keys 2 to 9. Press one key per letter. • The word changes as letters are typed – ignore what’s on the screen until the word is typed completely. • If the word is still incorrect after typing completely, press the down navigation key once or more to cycle through the other word options. Example: Press 4 6 6 3 to type Good. Press 4 6 6 3 [down navigation key] to type Home.
PAGE 230
Using the 123 (Numbers) Mode ! Note Refer to the table below for more information on the characters available using the keys. Characters in the order display The 123 Mode enables you to enter numbers in a text message (a telephone number, for example). Lower Case 1 .,/?!-:’”1 .,/?!-:’”1 Press the keys corresponding to the required digits before manually switching back to the appropriate text entry mode.
PAGE 231
SELECTING FUNCTIONS AND OPTIONS Your phone offers a set of functions that allow you to customize the phone. These functions are arranged in menus and sub-menus, accessed via the two soft keys marked < and >. Each menu and submenu allows you to view and alter the settings of a particular function. | SELECTING FUNCTIONS AND OPTIONS 26 The roles of the soft keys vary according to the current context; the label on the bottom line of the display just above each key indicates its current role.
PAGE 232
IN-CALL MENU Your phone provides a number of control functions that you can use during a call. To access these functions during a call, press the left soft key < [Options]. During a Call Making a Second Call (Network Dependent) To answer an incoming call when the handset is ringing, simply press the S key. The handset is also able to warn you of an incoming call while you are already on a call. A tone sounds in the earpiece, and the display will show that a second call is waiting.
PAGE 233
IN-CALL MENU Muting the Microphone You can mute the microphone during a call by pressing the [Options] key then selecting [Mute]. The handset can be unmuted by pressing the [Unmute]. When the handset is muted, the caller cannot hear you, but you can still hear them. | DTMF tones while calling IN-CALL MENU To switch on DTMF tones while calling (e.g. to use the phone with an automatic switchboard) press the key [Options] followed by Send DTMF – DTMF on. Select DTMF off to disable DTMF tones.
PAGE 234
Ending a Conference Call To activate a conference call on hold, press the S key. Alternatively press the left soft key [Options] and select Join all/Hold all calls. Other users on hold will stay connected. To return to conference call mode, press the left soft key < [Options] followed by Conference call. Currently displayed caller from a conference call can be disconnected by pressing the E key.
PAGE 235
MENU TREE 1 GAMES & APPS 1 Games & Apps 2 Profiles | MENU TREE 4 MULTIMEDIA 1 2 3 4 5 6 30 Camera Video camera Voice recorder MP3 Photo album Video album 2 CONTACTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Search Add new Caller groups Speed dial Own number My business card Settings 5 MESSAGES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 New message Inbox Drafts Outbox Listen to voice mail Info message Templates Settings 3 ORGANISER 7 1 Calendar 2 Memo 3 Calendar settings 6 MY STUFF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Videos Photos Images Music Sounds Text Games & Apps
PAGE 236
7 DISPLAY Wallpaper Menu Colour Standby text Backlight timer Brightness Network name Home Screen Shortcut Dial font colour * BROWSER 1 2 3 4 Home Bookmarks Go to URL Settings 8 PROFILES 1 2 3 4 5 General Silent Vibrate only Loud Headset 0 CALL REGISTER 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Missed calls Received calls Dialled calls All calls Delete recent calls Call charges GPRS information 9 TOOLS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Favourites Alarm clock Bluetooth Modem Calculator Unit converter World time Auto answer SIM Services (Depende
PAGE 237
GAMES & APPS Games & Apps [Menu 1-1] Default Games: In this menu, you can manage the Java applications installed in your phone. You can play or delete downloaded applications, or set the connect option. The downloaded applications are organised in folders. | Press the left soft key < [OK] to open the selected folder or launch the selected midlet. GAMES & APPS After selecting a folder, press [Options] and then sub menus available to several options are displayed. • Open: You can see the stored games.
PAGE 238
The software may be blocked or switch itself on when Java applications not specifically developed for the phone this manual refers to are downloaded, making it necessary to “restart” the handset. We would like to point out that these problems are caused by incompatible applications and are not a product fault. ! Caution | GAMES & APPS Only J2ME (Java 2 Micro Edition) based programs will run in a phone environment. The J2SE (Java 2 Standard Edition) based programs will only run in a PC environment.
PAGE 239
CONTACTS Search [Menu 2-1] 1. Select Search menu. 2. Enter the name that you want to search. ! Note Instant searching is available by inputting the initial letter of the name or number you want to search. | CONTACTS 34 3. If you want to edit, delete or copy an entry, select the left soft key < [Options]. The following menu will be displayed. • Edit: You can edit the name, number, group, character and picture by using the navigation key.
PAGE 240
1. Select Add new menu. Caller groups [Menu 2-3] • Group icon: Allows you to select the icon dependent on Group. • Add member: You can add group members. Each group should not exceed 20 members. • Remove member: You can remove the member from the Group member list. But the name and the number will be remained in phonebook. • Rename: You can change a group name. • Remove all: Allows you to delete all the members in the group.
PAGE 241
CONTACTS 1. Scroll to Speed dial, then press the left soft key < [OK]. 2. If you want to add speed dial, select (empty). Then, you can search the name in phonebook. 3. After assigning the number as speed dial, you can change and delete the entry. You can also make a call or send a message by this number. | Own number [Menu 2-5] CONTACTS (Sim dependent) You can save and check your own number in SIM card.
PAGE 242
• Copy/Move all • Memory in use This feature allows you to see how many entries are in use, or free in your phonebook. • Clear contacts 3. Enter the security code and press the left soft key < [OK] or the right soft key > [Back]. • Service dial number Use this function to access a particular list of services provided by your network operator (if supported by the SIM card). | CONTACTS You can copy/move entries from SIM card memory to Phone memory and vice versa.
PAGE 243
ORGANISER Calendar [Menu 3-1] When you enter this menu a calendar will be displayed. The month and year are shown at the top of the screen. Whenever you the change the date under the Settings menu, the calender will update automatically. To change the day, month, and year. Key Description | ORGANISER 13 Yearly *# Monthly Key UD LR Add new [Menu 3-1-1] G Allows you to add new schedule for the chosen day. You can store up to 20 notes. Y Input the subject and then press left soft key < [OK].
PAGE 244
Go to date [Menu 3-1-5] You can go the chosen date directly. Set alarm tone [Menu 3-1-6] Calendar settings [Menu 3-3] You can choose a type of calendar (A.D, Hijriya or Farsi) by using this function. You can set the alarm tone of each chosen date. Memo [Menu 3-2] 1. Select the Memo by pressing the left soft key < [OK]. 3. Input the memo and then press the left soft key < [OK]. ! Note | ORGANISER 2. If the entry is empty, press the left soft key < [Write].
PAGE 245
MULTIMEDIA You can enjoy your multimedia functions such as camera, voice recorder, MP3 for your fun and convenience. ! Note • When a low battery indication is given, the Camera or Multimedia function may not operate. • The battery level indication may appear lower when using the Multimedia functions, due to high current consumption. | Camera [Menu 4-1] MULTIMEDIA 1. Press the left soft key < [Menu], and then navigate and select Multimedia. Select Camera and the screen will now become the viewfinder.
PAGE 246
• Timer [ ]: Allows you to select the time delay (Off, 3 Seconds, 5 Seconds or 10 seconds). Then the phone takes a photo after the specified time. In Camera capture mode, you can adjust the brightness by pressing the Up/Down navigation keys. • Quality [ ]: Allows you to set the image quality from Normal, Fine and Superfine. To take a picture with a side camera key • White Balance [ ]: Allows you to change the settings according to the environment. 2. You can enter to camera capture mode directly.
PAGE 247
MULTIMEDIA • White Balance [ ]: Allows you to change the settings according to the environment. ]: You may select recording • Record time [ time from the list: 1 min, 5 min, 30 min, 90 min and unlimited. • Exit [ ]: Back to the screen mode to take videos. • Effect [ ]: 4 settings are available: Colour, Sepia, Black & White, Negative. | • Flash [ ]: Allows you to set the flash when you take a video in dark surroundings.
PAGE 248
MP3 [Menu 4-4] The KG320 has an integrated MP3 player. You can enjoy listening to MP3 music files on your phone memory using a compatible headset or via the internal loudspeaker. ! Note The music player supports: • MPEG-1 Layer III, MPEG-2 Layer III, MPEG-2.5 Layer III: Sampling frequency up from 8KHz to 48KHz. Bit rate up to 320Kbps, stereo.
PAGE 249
MULTIMEDIA • If you received a call during activating the mass storage menu, the call will be rejected. If you remove the cable, you can view the list of missed call. MP3 player [Menu 4-4-1] The following screen is shown up.
PAGE 250
Playlist [Menu 4-4-2] This menu allows you to view the whole play list. You can move through the tracks by pressing the navigation key. In addition, once you have selected the track, you can delete the file or view its information via the options menu. Settings [Menu 4-4-3] • Equalizer • Playmode This menu allows you to set the play mode: Play all, Repeat all, Repeat one. • Set shuffle If you select the ON option, then your saved tracks will be played in a random order.
PAGE 251
MULTIMEDIA • Send via Bluetooth: You can send a picture by Bluetooth. • Send via Bluetooth: Send the selected file to another device via Bluetooth • Delete: You can delete a picture. • Rename: Change the file name of selected file. The maximum length of characters is 34. In filename it’s impossible to use symbols such as / < > # @ * and etc. And You can’t change the extension of file. • Rename: You can edit the title of picture. • Delete all photos: You can delete all photos at the same time.
PAGE 252
MESSAGES New message [Menu 5-1] This menu includes functions related to SMS (Short Message Service), MMS (Multimedia Message Service), as well as the network’s service messages. Write text message [Menu 5-1-1] You can write and edit text message, checking the number of message pages. 1. Enter the New message menu by pressing the left soft key < [OK]. 3. To make text input easier, use T9. Options • Send: Sends text messages. 1. Enter numbers of recipient. 2. Press D key to add more recipients.
PAGE 253
MESSAGES • Save to drafts: Stores messages in the Drafts folder. • Font & Alignment: You can select the Size and Style of font, and the Alignment of text. • Colour: You can also set the Colour of the text (foreground) and the background. • Add T9 dictionary: You can add your own words. This menu will only be shown when the edit mode has been set to T9ABC/T9Abc/T9abc. | • T9 languages: Select the desired language for T9 input mode. You can also deactivate the T9 input mode by selecting ‘T9 off’.
PAGE 254
• Insert: You can add photos, images, sounds, contacts, symbol, new photo, new sound, text templates and my business card. ! Note All messages will be automatically saved in the outbox folder, even after a sending failure. • Preview: You can preview multimedia messages you have created. • Save: You can save multimedia messages To drafts or As template. • Add slide: You can add a slide before or after current slide. • Move to slide: You can move to previous or next slide.
PAGE 255
MESSAGES Inbox [Menu 5-2] You will be alerted when you have received a message. They will be stored in the Inbox. In the Inbox, you can identify each message by icons. For detail, see the icon directive. Icon Icon directive SIM message means that the message is exceptionally stored in the SIM card. You can move this message to the phone. When you are notified that you have received a multimedia message, you have to wait for the message to be downloaded before you can view it.
PAGE 256
Drafts [Menu 5-3] Icon Icon directive Using this menu, you can preset up to five multimedia messages that you use most frequently. This menu shows the preset multimedia message list. MMS Unsent The following options are available. SMS delivery confirmed • View: You can see the multimedia messages. • Edit: Allows you to modify the chosen message. • Delete: Deletes the message you choose. SMS unsent • View: You can view the message. • Forward: You can forward the selected message to another party.
PAGE 257
MESSAGES Read ! Note When you receive a voice mail, your phone will display an icon and you will hear an alert. Please check with your network provider for details of their service in order to configure the handset correctly. Info message [Menu 5-6] (Dependent to network and subscription) | MESSAGES Info service messages are text messages delivered by the network to your handset. They provide general information such as weather reports, traffic news, taxis, pharmacies, and stock prices.
PAGE 258
Templates [Menu 5-7] Text templates [Menu 5-7-1] You have 6 text templates as below; • Write messages: You can write and send multimedia messages. • Edit: You can edit multimedia templates. • Delete all: Allows you to delete all multimedia messages. • Please call me back. • I’m late. I will be there at • Where are you now? Settings • I am on the way. Text message • Top urgent. Please contact.
PAGE 259
MESSAGES • Reply charging: When a message is sent, it allows the recipients to reply and charge the cost of the reply to your telephone bill. • SMS centre: If you want to send the text message, you can receive the address of SMS centre through this menu. Multimedia message [Menu 5-8-2] • Priority: You can set the priority of the message you choose. | MESSAGES 54 • Validity period: This network service allows you to set how long your multimedia messages will be stored at the message centre.
PAGE 260
• Home: You can listen to voice mails by selecting Home. • Roaming: Even when you are abroad, you can listen to voice mails if a roaming service is supported. Info message Push messages [Menu 5-8-5] You can set the option whether you will receive the message or not. [Menu 5-8-4] • Receive • Alert Yes: Your phone will beep when you have received Info service message numbers. No: Your phone will not beep even though you have received info service messages.
PAGE 261
MY STUFF ! Note Do not change the default folder name, or it does not work properly. Videos [Menu 6-1] Show the list of 3GP, 3G2, MP4 (up to 208X160) files at My media\Videos in Multimedia memory. MY STUFF • Play: You can play the video file by pressing the OK key or selecting Play from the Option menu. • Send via Bluetooth: Send the selected file to another device via Bluetooth. | • Rename: change the file name of the selected file. The maximum length of characters is 34.
PAGE 262
Images [Menu 6-3] After selecting a image, press the left soft key < [View] and then you can check the options as follow: • Set as wallpaper: Currently selected image can be set as a wallpaper. • Send via Bluetooth: The sound downloaded from network can be sent by Bluetooth. Music [Menu 6-4] • Delete: Delete a file. • Delete all: Deletes all files in the list • Information: Shows the file information. Sounds [Menu 6-5] After selecting a sound, press the left soft key [Options].
PAGE 263
MY STUFF Text [Menu 6-6] Show the list of TXT files at My media\Text in Multimedia memory. • View: You can see the TXT file by pressing the OK key or selecting View from the Option menu. ! Note The maximum size of TXT file you can see is 460Kbytes. MY STUFF • Send via Bluetooth: Send the selected file to another device via Bluetooth. | • Rename: change the file name of selected file. The maximum length of characters is 34. And You can not change the extension of file. • Delete: Delete a file.
PAGE 264
DISPLAY You can set functions relating to the phone. Wallpaper [Menu 7-1] You can select the background pictures in standby mode. Default [Menu 7-1-1] You can select a picture or an animation of wallpaper by pressing U , D , L , R. [Menu 7-1-2] You can select a picture or an animation as wallpaper. Menu Colour [Menu 7-2] Your phone provides you with 4 menu colour themes. Set the menu colour by scrolling and pressing the left soft key < [OK].
PAGE 265
PROFILES In Profiles, you can adjust and customise the phone tones for different events, environments, or caller groups. • Ring tone: Select the desired ring tone from the list. R • Ring volume: Set the volume of the ringing tone. There are five preset profiles: General, Silent, Vibrate only, Loud and Headset. Each profile can be personalised. Press the left soft key [Menu] and select Profiles using up/down navigation keys. Y c • Message tone: Select the alert tone for messages.
PAGE 266
. Rename [Menu 8-X-3] You can rename a profile and give it any name you choose to. ! Note Vibrate only, Silent and Headset profiles cannot be renamed. 1. To change the name of a profile, scroll to the profile in the profile list and after pressing the left soft key < or the OK key, select Rename. PROFILES | 2. Key in the desired name and press the OK key or the left soft key < [OK].
PAGE 267
TOOLS Favourites [Menu 9-1] This option allows you to add your own favourites to the list already provided. Once you create your own menu, you can access the desired function quickly in the idle screen by pressing the up navigation key. ! Note The menu of SMS, MMS and MP3 is already provided in your own favourites. Alarm clock [Menu 9-3] Bluetooth enables compatible mobile devices, peripherals and computers that are in close proximity to communicate directly with each other without wires.
PAGE 268
- Phonebook contacts (.VCF): Phonebook. - Text (.txt): Text folder. - Other files (.*.*): Other folder under Multimedia. • Supported Bluetooth software (Bluetooth stacks) for DUN: WIDCOMM Bluetooth for Windows 1.4 and 3.0 Paired devices [Menu 9-3-1] You can view all devices which are compatible with Bluetooth phone. ! Note Due to a compatibility problem, some devices may not support this function.
PAGE 269
TOOLS • My handset’s visibility You can set the function that your phone is visible on the other Bluetooth devices. • My handset’s name You can set the name of Bluetooth device. The default name is LG KG320. Supported services [Menu 9-3-4] You can see the Bluetooth service list, like a File transfer, Image printing, PC sync and so on. Modem Calculator [Menu 9-5] This contains the standard functions such as +, –, x, ÷ : Addition, Subtraction, Multiplication, and Division.
PAGE 270
Unit converter [Menu 9-6] This converts any measurement into a unit you want. There are 9 types that can be converted into units: Currency, Surface, Length, Weight, Temperature, Volume, Velocity, Shoes and Clothes. Auto answer [Menu 9-8] Allow you to set your phone into automatic answering mode for adjusting environment. General [Menu 9-8-1] 1. You can select one of nine unit types by pressing the left soft key < [OK]. You can adjust the answering phone mode as General. 2.
PAGE 271
TOOLS The submenus • Activate Allows to Activate answering phone mode, which you selected. • Listen to voice guide Allow you to listen to current voice guide, which you selected. • Record new voice guide Allow you to record new voice guide for 15 seconds when you select User defined menu. Recorded messages [Menu 9-8-6] TOOLS | It shows the list of recorded messages including recorder’s name and recorded time at the bottom of the screen. • Playback: You can listen the recorded voice messages.
PAGE 272
SIM Service [Menu 9-9] This menu depends on SIM and the network services. ! Note • In case the SIM card support SAT (i.e. SIM Application Toolkit) services, this menu will be the operator specific service name stored on the SIM card. • In case the SIM card does not support SAT services, this menu will be Profiles.
PAGE 273
BROWSER You can access various WAP (Wireless Application Protocol) services such as banking, news, weather reports and flight information. These services are specially designed for mobile phones and they are maintained by WAP service providers. Check the availability of WAP services, pricing and tariffs with your network operator and/or the service provider whose service you wish to use. Service providers will also give you instructions on how to use their services.
PAGE 274
Bookmarks [Menu *-2] Go to URL [Menu *-3] This menu allows you to store the URL of favourite web pages for easy access at a later time. You can connect directly to the site you want. After entering a specific URL, press the OK key. To create a bookmark 1. Press the left soft key < [Options]. Settings 2. Select Add new and press the OK key. 3. After entering the desired URL and title, press the OK key. After selecting a desired bookmark, the following options are available.
PAGE 275
BROWSER - Homepage: This setting allows you to enter the address (URL) of a site you want to use as homepage. You do not need to type http:// at the front of each URL as the WAP Browser will automatically add it. - Bearer: You can set the bearer data service. Linger time: You need to enter timeout period. After entering that, the WAP navigation service will be unavailable if any data is not input or transferred.
PAGE 276
• Rename: You can change the profile name. Security • Add new: You can add a new profile. A list of the available certification is shown. • Delete: Deletes the selected profile from the list. • Authority: You can see the list of authority certificates that have been stored in your phone. Cache [Menu *-4-2] The information or services you have accessed are saved in the cache memory of the phone.
PAGE 277
CALL REGISTER You can check the record of missed, received, and dialled calls only if the network supports the Calling Line Identification (CLI) within the service area. The number and name (if available) are displayed together with the date and time at which the call was made. You can also view call times. Missed calls [Menu 0-1] This option lets you view the last 10 unanswered calls.
PAGE 278
All calls [Menu 0-4] • Dialled calls: Length of the outgoing calls. You can view all lists of outgoing or incoming calls. • Reset all: Allows you to reset the timers of all calls by pressing the left soft key < [Yes]. Delete recent calls Call costs [Menu 0-5] [Menu 0-6-2] Allows you to delete Missed calls and Received calls lists. You can delete Dialled calls and All calls lists at one time. Allows you to check the cost of your last call, all calls, remaining and reset the cost.
PAGE 279
CALL REGISTER • Auto display: This network service allows you to see automatically the cost of your last calls. If set to On, you can see the last cost when the call is released. D GPRS information • [Menu 0-7] You can check the amount of data transferred over the network through the GPRS information option. In addition, you can also view how much time you are online. CALL REGISTER Call duration [Menu 0-7-1] You can check the duration of Last call and All calls. You can also reset the call timers.
PAGE 280
SETTINGS Date & Time [Menu #-1] You can set functions relating to the date and time. Date [Menu #-1-1] • Set date • Date format You can set the Date format such as DD/MM/ YYYY, MM/DD/YYYY, YYYY/MM/DD. (D: Day / M: Month / Y: Year) [Menu #-1-2] • Set time Call divert [Menu #-4-1] The Call divert service allows you to divert incoming voice calls, fax calls, and data calls to another number. For details, contact your service provider.
PAGE 281
SETTINGS • If no reply Diverts voice calls which you do not answer. • If out of reach Diverts voice calls when the phone is switched off or out of coverage. • All data calls Diverts to a number with a PC connection unconditionally. • All fax calls Diverts to a number with a fax connection unconditionally. • Cancel all SETTINGS Cancels all call divert service. The submenus Call divert menus have the submenus shown below. | • Activate Activate the corresponding service.
PAGE 282
Send my number [Menu #-4-3] (network and subscription dependent) • Set by network If you select this, you can send your phone number depending on two line service such as line 1 or line 2. • On You can send your phone number to another party. Your phone number will be shown on the receiver’s phone. • Off Your phone number will not be shown. [Menu #-4-4] • Activate If you select Activate, you can accept a waiting (receiving) call. If you select Cancel, you cannot recognize the waiting (receiving) call.
PAGE 283
SETTINGS Security PIN code request [Menu #-5] [Menu #-5-1] In this menu, you can set the phone to ask for the PIN code of your SIM card when the phone is switched on. If this function is activated, you’ll be requested to enter the PIN code. 1. Select PIN code request in the security settings menu, and then press the left soft key < [OK]. 2. Set Enable/Disable 3. If you want to change the setting, you need to enter PIN code when you switch on the phone. SETTINGS 4.
PAGE 284
• Outgoing international The barring service for all outgoing international calls. • Outgoing international when roaming The barring service for all international outgoing calls except home network. • All incoming The barring service for all incoming calls. • Incoming when roaming The barring service for all incoming calls when roaming. • Cancel all • Change password You can change the password for Call Barring Service. The submenus: • Activate Set the selected call restriction off.
PAGE 285
SETTINGS Change codes [Menu #-5-6] PIN is an abbreviation of Personal Identification Number to prevent use by unauthorized person. You can change the access codes: Security code, PIN code, PIN2 code. 1. If you want to change the Security code/PIN1/ PIN2 code input your original code, and then press the left soft key < [OK]. 2. Input new Security code/PIN/PIN2 code and verify them. Network SETTINGS | Network selection You can select a network type.
PAGE 286
Band selection [Menu #-6-2] • EGSM/DCS According to depending on Network situation, you can select EGSM/DCS. • PCS only According to depending on Network situation, you can select PCS only. GPRS Attach [Menu #-7] When needed [Menu #-7-2] If you select this menu, the GPRS connection is established when you connect a WAP service and closed when you end the WAP connection. Memory status [Menu #-8] You can check free space and memory usage of each repository, Internal memory, and Multimedia memory.
PAGE 287
ACCESSORIES There are various accessories for your mobile phone. You can select these options according to your personal communication requirements. Standard Battery Travel Adapter This charger allows you to charge the battery while away from home or your office. ACCESSORIES Data cable/CD You can connect your phone to PC to exchange the data between them.
PAGE 288
TECHNICAL DATA General Product name : KG320 System : GSM 900 / DCS 1800 / PCS 1900 Ambient Temperatures Max : +55°C Min : -10°C TECHNICAL DATA | 83
PAGE 289
84